RAV4 (2013) - Car TOYOTA - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL RAV4 (2013) TOYOTA

	Pictorial index	Search by illustration
1	For safety and security	Make sure to read through them
2	Instrument cluster	How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of warning lights and indicators, etc.
3	Operation of each component	Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving, etc.
4	Driving	Operations and advices which are necessary for driving
5	Interior features	Usage of the interior features, etc.
6	Maintenance and care	Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
7	When trouble arises	What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
8	Vehicle specifications	Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.
9	For owners	Reporting safety defects for US owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
	Index	Search by symptom
		Search alphabetically

For your information.... 8

Reading this manual.... 14

How to search.... 15

Pictorial index 16

For safety and security

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.... 26

For safety drive 28

Seat belts 30

SRS airbags.... 38

Front passenger occupant classification system ...... 51

Safety information for children .... 58

Child restraint systems...... 59

Installing child restraints..... 63

Exhaust gas precautions..... 76

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system.... 77

Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.) 79

2

Instrument cluster

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators......82

Gauges and meters......87

Multi-information display.....89

3

Operation of each component

3-1. Key information

Keys....96

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart key system....99

Wireless remote control.....113

Side doors 120

Back door 125

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats....137

Rear seats 139

Driving position memory....143

Head restraints .....147

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel....150

Inside rear view mirror.....151

Outside rear view mirrors ....154

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows....156

Moon roof 159

4 Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle...... 164

Cargo and luggage...... 176

Vehicle load limits 180

Trailer towing.... 181

Dinghy towing.... 196

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system)...... 197

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system)...... 200

Automatic transmission..... 207

Turn signal lever.... 214

Parking brake.... 215

Horn 216

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch...... 217

Automatic High Beam ..... 221

Fog light switch 228

Windshield wipers and washer 229

Rear window wiper and washer 234

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap....237

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control .....241

LDA (Lane Departure Alert).....245

Intuitive parking assist .....253

All-wheel drive lock switch (AWD models).....259

Driving assist systems.....260

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)......266

• The Blind Spot Monitor function....270

• The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function .....273

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips......276

Utility vehicle precautions....281

5 Interior features

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Manual air conditioning system.... 288

Automatic air conditioning system ... 295

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers.... 305

Windshield wiper de-icer... 307

5-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types ......308

Using the radio ....312

Using the CD player .....315

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs ....320

Operating an iPod......327

Operating a USB memory....335

Optimal use of the audio system ....343

Using the AUX port......345

Using the steering wheel audio switches....346

Bluetooth ^® audio/phone ....349

Using the Bluetooth ^® audio/phone....354

Operating a Bluetooth ^® enabled portable player....359

Making a phone call......362

Using the "SETUP" menu ("Bluetooth*" menu) 367

Using the "SETUP" menu ("PHONE" menu)...372

5-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list......377

- Interior lights......378

• Personal lights......378

5-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features..... 380

• Glove box...... 381
- Console box...... 382
• Cup holders 383
- Bottle holders...... 384

Luggage compartment features...... 385

5-5. Other interior features

Sun visors and vanity mirrors.... 395

Clock 396

Power outlets 397

Seat heaters.... 398

Armrest...... 400

Coat hooks...... 401

Assist grips.... 402

6 Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...... 404

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior...... 408

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements.... 412

General maintenance..... 415

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs.... 419

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions....420

Hood....425

Positioning a floor jack.....427

Engine compartment .....429

Tires....443

Tire inflation pressure......454

Wheels......457

Air conditioning filter .....460

Wireless remote control/electronic key battery....462

Checking and replacing fuses....465

Light bulbs 476

7 When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers.....492

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency....493

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed 495

If you think something is wrong..... 501

Fuel pump shut off system.... 502

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds .... 503

If you have a flat tire...... 519

If the engine will not start.... 536

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.... 538

If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system).... 539

If the vehicle battery is discharged.... 542

If your vehicle overheats ... 546

If the vehicle becomes stuck.... 549

8 Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) .....552 Fuel information.....563 Tire information.....566

8-2. Customization

Customizable features.....579

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize....587

9 For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ....590

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)....591

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)....593

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting) 604

Alphabetical index...... 609

For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to the "Display Audio System Owner's Manual" for information regarding the equipment listed below.

- Navigation system

- Rear view monitor system

- Audio system

For your information

Main Owner's Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
●Anti-lock brake system
●SRS airbag system
- Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

Vehicle data recordings

Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations, sounds or pictures.

●Data usage

Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-stened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  • How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

●Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit

However, if necessary, Toyota may:

- Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

- Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

CAUTION

■General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■General precaution regarding children's safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Reading this manual

CAUTION:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.

3… Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Indicates the component or position being explained.

Means "Do not", "Do not do this", or "Do not let this happen".

Diagram showing a car interior with a door panel and a hand inserting a clip into the window (no text or symbols)

IIEPRV001

How to search

■Searching by name

• Alphabetical index.....P. 609

ABS? SRS? ABS-100 SRS-200 INPGS035

■Searching by installation position

- Pictorial index.....P. 16

Illustration of a person reading a book with a lightbulb above, next to a computer interface (no text or symbols visible)

■Searching by symptom or sound

• What to do if... (Troubleshooting).....P. 604

Illustration of a person reading a book with a lightbulb and electric shock effect next to a car (no text or symbols)

■Searching by title

• Table of contents.....P. 2

Illustration of a person reading an open book with a lightbulb above, symbolizing knowledge or ideas (no text or symbols present)

Pictorial index

Exterior

Diagram of two car rear view with numbered labels pointing to each side of the front body.

① Side doors P. 120

Locking/unlocking P. 100, 113

Opening/closing the door glasses P. 156

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key ..... P. 539

Warning lights P. 507

② Back door P. 125

Opening from inside the cabin. P. 125

Opening from outside....P. 100, 113

Warning lights P. 507

③ Outside rear view mirrors....P. 154

Adjusting the mirror angle P. 154

Folding the mirrors....P.154

Driving position memory ^*1 P. 143

Defogging the mirrors ^*1 P. 305

④ Windshield wipers P. 229

Precautions against winter season....P.276

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer) ^*1 ....P. 307

⑤ Fuel filler door....P. 237

Refueling method....P. 237

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity P. 554

⑥ Tires....P. 443

Tire size/inflation pressure .....P. 561

Winter tires/tire chain P. 276

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system.....P. 443

Coping with flat tires P. 519

⑦ Hood....P. 425

Opening P. 425

Engine oil. P. 555

Coping with overheat. P. 546

⑧ Camera ^*1,2

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

(Replacing method: P. 476, Watts: P. 562)

⑨ Headlights/daytime running lights....P. 217

⑩ Parking lights P. 217

⑪ Fog lights*1 P. 228

⑫ Turn signal lights*1 P. 214

⑬ Tail lights ...... P. 217

⑭ Stop/tail lights P. 217

⑮ License plate lights....P. 217

⑯ Back-up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R. P. 207

⑰ Side marker lights P. 217

^*1 : If equipped

^* 2: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

Instrument panel

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference.

① Engine switch....P. 197, 200

Starting the engine/changing the modes ..... P. 197, 201

Emergency stop of the engine. P. 493

When the engine will not start P. 536

② Shift lever P. 207

Changing the shift position....P.207

Precautions against towing P. 495

When the shift lever does not move. P. 538

③ Meters P. 87

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light. . . . . P. 87

Warning lights/indicator lights P. 82

When the warning lights come on P. 503

④ Multi-information display ..... P. 89

Display....P.89

⑤ Parking brake lever....P. 215

Applying/releasing P.215

Precautions against winter season....P.277

⑥ Turn signal lever P. 214

Headlight switch....P.217

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights....P.217

Fog lights ^*1 P. 228

⑦ Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 229

Usage P.229

Adding washer fluid P. 442

⑧ Hood lock release lever. P. 425

⑨ Manual air conditioning system*1 P. 288

Automatic air conditioning system ^*1 P. 295

Usage P. 288, 295

Rear window defogger.... P. 305

⑩ Audio system....P. 308

Audio system ^*1 P. 308

Display Audio system ^*1,2

⑪ Clock....P. 396

⑫ Power back door main switch ^*1 P. 127

⑬ Fuel filler door opener....P. 239

^*1 : If equipped

^*2 : For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

Switches

Diagram of car interior showing numbered switches and dashboard controls with Chinese labels

① Outside rear view mirror switches....P. 154
② Instrument panel light control dial....P. 88
③ VSC OFF switch....P. 262
④ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch ^1 P. 266
⑤ All-wheel drive lock switch ^1 P. 259
⑥ Power back door switch ^1 P. 125
⑦ Driving position memory switches ^1 P. 143
⑧ Power window switches....P. 156
⑨ Door lock switch....P. 121
⑩ Window lock switch. P. 156
⑪ Tire pressure warning reset switch ^*1 P. 446

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ SRS AIRBAG IINPRV003

① Audio remote control switches ^2 P. 346
② Telephone switches ^2 P. 355
③ Talk switch ^1,2
④ “DISP” button*2 P. 90
⑤ Cruise control switch P. 241
⑥ Tilt and telescopic steering control lever....P. 150
⑦ Back switch ^1,2

^*1 : If equipped

^*2 : For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

Diagram of car interior with numbered components and labeled switches, likely for automotive control or diagnostic reference.

① Emergency flasher switch P. 492
② Intuitive parking assist switch ^1 P. 253
③ LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch ^1 P. 245
④ Driving mode select switches P. 209
⑤ Seat heater switches ^1 P. 398
⑥ Windshield wiper de-icer switch ^1 P. 307
⑦ AUX port/USB port ^*2 P. 327, 335, 345
⑧ Power outlets....P. 397

Interior

Diagram of car interior with numbered labels pointing to various compartments and seats

① SRS airbags....P. 38
② Floor mats....P.26
③ Front seats....P. 137
④ Rear seats....P. 139
⑤ Head restraints....P. 147
⑥ Seat belts....P. 30
⑦ Console box....P. 382
⑧ Inside lock buttons....P. 121
⑨ Cup holders....P. 383
⑩ Bottle holders.....P. 384

^*1 : If equipped

^*2 : For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ INPRV006

① Inside rear view mirror P. 151
② Sun visors P. 395
③ Vanity mirrors....P. 395
④ Interior lights ^2 P. 378
⑤ Personal lights P. 378
⑥ Moon roof switches ^1 P. 159

^*1 : If equipped

^* 2: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

For safety and security

1

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.... 26

For safety drive 28

Seat belts.... 30

SRS airbags.... 38

Front passenger occupant classification system...... 51

Safety information for children.... 58

Child restraint systems..... 59

Installing child restraints..... 63

Exhaust gas precautions..... 76

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system 77

Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)....79

Before driving

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.

Diagram showing a car seatbelt mechanism with a close-up view of the wheel and seat (no text or symbols present)

2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

IIN1RV002

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to an accident, or leading to death or a serious injury.

■When installing the driver's floor mat

• Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
• Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
  ●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
• Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
• Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

Before driving

• Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
  With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

IIIN1RV003

For safety drive

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.

Correct driving posture

① Adjust the angle of the seat-back so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. (→P. 137)
② Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (→P. 137)
③ Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 147)
④ Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 30)

① ② ③ ④ IIN1RV004

Correct use of the seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (→P.30)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

$$ (\rightarrow \mathrm{P}. 5 9) $$

Adjusting the mirrors

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 151, 154)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.
  Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
• Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
  A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
  ●Do not place anything under the front seats.
  Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
• When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.
  Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

● Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the seat-back. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.

Line drawing of a person sitting on a chair holding a long object, no text or symbols present

Fastening and releasing the seat belt (except for the rear center seat)

① To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.
② To release the seat belt, press the release button.

Release button IIN1RV006

Fastening the seat belt (for the rear center seat)

1 Press the plate to release, and then pull the seat belt.

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle adjustment with arrows indicating movement, including a close-up of the seatbelt and a downward arrow.

2 Push the plate into the buckle in the order of plate "A" and plate "B" until a clicking sound is heard.

① Plate “A”, buckle “A”
② Plate "B", buckle "B"

Plate "B" Plate "A" ② Buckle "B" ① Buckle "A" IIN1RV008

Releasing and stowing the seat belt (for the rear center seat)

1 To release the hooked buckle "B", push the buckle release button.

Release button IIN1RV135

2 To release the hooked plate "A", insert the mechanical key (→P. 96) or plate "B" or the wireless key into the hole on the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, retract it slowly.

IIN1RV009

3 Stow the plates in the cover.

① Put plate “A” and “B” together, and then stow the plates in the cover.
② Fully insert the plates all the way.
③ Push down the plate until a click is heard to lock it.

Diagram showing car seatbelt buckle assembly steps with numbered instructions for lifting and adjusting the seat.

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)

① Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release button.
② Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

① ② IIN1RV007

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioner does not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.

Line drawing of a car interior showing two people seated in the driver's seat, with no visible text or symbols.

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 63)

■Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

• Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 59)
• When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P. 30)

■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of charge.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted, showing rope and seat (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■Wearing a seat belt

● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■ Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 30)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

Two line drawings of a person seated in different positions, one holding a seatbelt, the other standing upright (no text or symbols)

■People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 30)

CAUTION

■When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■Seat belt pretensioners

• Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
• If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

■Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 33)

■ Seat belt damage and wear

• Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.
• Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
• Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.
• Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
• Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

■ Using a seat belt extender

• Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
• Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
  ●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

■When using the rear center seat belt

Do not use the rear center seat belt with either buckle released. Fastening only one of the buckles may result in death or serious injury in case of sudden braking or a collision.

IIN1RV105

NOTICE

■When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

Diagram of car interior components with numbered labels indicating different parts of the vehicle.

◆ SRS front airbags

① SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
② SRS driver knee airbag Can help provide driver protection
③ SRS seat cushion airbag Can help restrain the front passenger

◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags

④ SRS side airbags Can help protect the torso and hip of the front seat occupants
⑤ SRS curtain shield airbags
●Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
●Can prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover

SRS airbag system components

Diagram of a car's internal components with numbered labels pointing to various parts of the body.

① Side impact sensors (front doors)
② Front passenger airbag
③ Curtain shield airbags
④ Front passenger's seat cushion airbag
⑤ Side airbags
⑥ "AIR BAG ON" and "AIR BAG OFF" indicator lights
⑦ Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch
⑧ SRS warning light
⑨ Driver airbag

⑩ Side impact sensors (rear)
⑪ Seat belt pretensioners and force limiters
⑫ Driver's seat position sensor
⑬ Driver's seat belt buckle switch
⑭ Driver knee airbag
⑮ Front impact sensors
⑯ Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)
⑰ Airbag sensor assembly

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

CAUTION

■SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver's airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

- If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

CAUTION

■SRS airbag precautions

If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

IID1RV003

- The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright. - Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (→P. 59)

- Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

ID1RV004

CAUTION

■SRS airbag precautions

• Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
• Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

●Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

- Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

- Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

No IID1RV005

IID1RV006

IID1RV007

IID1RV008

CAUTION

■SRS airbag precautions

- Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.

IID1RV009

● Vehicles without a smart key system: Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard objects such as keys and accessories to the key. The objects may restrict the SRS knee airbag inflation or be thrust into the driver's seat area by the force of the deploying airbag, thus causing a danger.

IID1RV010

- Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.

- If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

- Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags and seat cushion airbag from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags and SRS seat cushion airbag to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

- Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

- Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

- If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

- If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper or side of the occupant compartment
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo bar etc.) or roof luggage carrier
Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating) SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will activate.

- The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied. (→P. 51)

- The SRS seat cushion airbag on the front passenger's seat will not operate if the occupant is not wearing a seat belt.

■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

●The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

●The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.

Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or falling

Four illustrations showing a car collision with an arrow indicating impact, no text or symbols present.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.

●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone

Two car illustrations showing different positions on a surface, one with visible suspension and the other with motion blur (no text or symbols)

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

• Collision from the side
• Collision from the rear
  ● Vehicle rollover

Diagram showing three car under collision scenarios: front, rear, and side (no text or symbols)

■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

●Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

●Collision from the side at an angle

Diagram showing two mechanical components with arrows indicating direction of movement (no text or symbols)

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

Collision from the front

- Collision from the rear

● Vehicle rollover

Diagram showing three car top-down views with arrows indicating motion direction (no text or symbols)

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

- Collision from the rear

● Pitching end over end

Diagram showing three car collision scenarios with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

■When to contact your Toyota dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

●The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

Top-down line drawing of a car with airflow or ventilation system, no text or symbols present

● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

Top-down line drawing of a car viewed from the side, showing front and rear views with no text or symbols.

●The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Interior view of a vehicle dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

The front passenger's seat cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a multi-level car seat assembly with no text or symbols

●The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and seat (no text or symbols)

●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and rear seats (no text or symbols)

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

① ② PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ③ AIR BAG ON ④ IID1RV022

① Seat belt reminder light
② SRS warning light
③ “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
④ "AIR BAG ON" indicator light

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Adult\*1

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG ON”
	SRS warning light Off
	Seat belt reminder light	Off^*2 or flashing^*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Activated
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag	Activated^*2 or deactivated^*3
	Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter	Activated

Child* 4

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF” or “AIR BAG ON”*4
	SRS warning light Off
	Seat belt reminder light	Off*2 or flashing*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag	Deactivated or activated*4
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat	Activated
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag	Deactivated or activated*2, 4
	Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter	Activated

■Child restraint system with infant* 5

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF”*6
	SRS warning light Off
	Seat belt reminder light	Off^*2 or flashing^*3
Devices	Front passenger airbag Deactivated
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat	Activated
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag Deactivated
	Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter	Activated

■ Unoccupied

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF”
	SRS warning light	Off
	Seat belt reminder light
Devices	Front passenger airbag Deactivated
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat	Activated
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag Deactivated
	Front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter	Activated

There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/warning light	“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights	“AIR BAG OFF”
	SRS warning light On
	Seat belt reminder light Off
Devices	Front passenger airbag Deactivated
	Side airbag on the front passenger seat	Activated
	Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
	Front passenger seat cushion airbag Deactivated
	Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner and force limiter	Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

^*2 : In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*4: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.

*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 59)

*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. (→P. 63)

CAUTION

■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger's seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
Make sure the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
- Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pockets).
- Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
- Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
- Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

CAUTION

■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

• Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
  If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the "AIR BAG ON" indicator light is illuminated. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
• When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 63)
• Do not modify or remove the front seats.
• Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
  ● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
• Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
• Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

Safety information for children

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

●It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
- Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.
●Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats etc.

CAUTION

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.

• Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
• For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.
  General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (ⅡP. 63)

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child:

Rear facing — Infant seat/convertible seat

Forward facing — Convertible seat

Illustration of a baby car seatbelt in a car seat, no text or symbols present

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat inside a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

Booster seat

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt, seated in a vehicle seat (no text or symbols visible)

■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

- Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt.

- If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 30)

CAUTION

■Child restraint precautions

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
●Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
- Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of an accident.

CAUTION

■Child restraint precautions

• Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
  Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

■When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child's neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

■When the child restraint system is not in use

• Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
• If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the outside rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

IIN1RV024a

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver's seat belt) (→P. 34)

Line drawing of a car seatbelt assembly with no text or symbols

Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)

An anchor bracket is provided for each rear seat. (Labels displaying the location of the anchor bracket.)

IIN1RV030b

Installation with LATCH system

1 Adjust the seatback to the 8th lock position from the fully reclined position. (→P. 139)

① Fully reclined position
② 8th lock position

① ② IIN1RV099

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint. (→P. 147)

2 Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

▶ Type A

3 Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only IIN1RV033a

▶ Type B

3 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only IIN1RV034a

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

■ Rear-facing — Infant seat/convertible seat

1 Adjust the seatback to the 8th lock position from the fully reclined position. (→P. 139)

① Fully reclined position
② 8th lock position

① ② IIN1RV099

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint. (→P. 147)

2 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly (no text or symbols)

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with a diagonal belt and a red arrow indicating a specific seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being lifted, showing a hand adjusting the seat (no text or symbols present)

5 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with arrows indicating force or movement (no text or symbols)

■ Forward-facing — Convertible seat

1 Adjust the seatback to the 8th lock position from the fully reclined position. (→P. 139)

① Fully reclined position
② 8th lock position

① ② IIN1RV099

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint. (→P. 147)

2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car backseat with seatbelt and rear seats (no text or symbols)

3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt assembly with a red arrow indicating the seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car seatbelt switch mechanism with a hand adjusting the seat (no text or symbols present)

5 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Diagram of a car seatbelt assembly with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

6 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 71)

■ Booster seat

1 Adjust the seatback to the 8th lock position from the fully reclined position.

(→P. 139)

① Fully reclined position
② 8th lock position

① ② IIN1RV099

If your child restraint system interferes with a head restraint and cannot be installed properly, install the child restraint system after removing the head restraint. (→P. 147)

2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

▶ Booster type ▶ High back type

Line drawing of a car backseat with seatbelt and seat, no text or symbols present

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with no text or symbols

3 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible.

(→P. 30)

Illustration of a child wearing a car seatbelt, seated in a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

Illustration of a car seatbelt buckle being inserted, showing a red arrow indicating the buckle (no text or symbols present)

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

1 Remove the head restraint.

Diagram of a car seatbelt with an upward arrow indicating motion, no text or symbols present

2 Secure the child restraint system using the seat belt.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with rear seats and seat, no text or symbols present

3 Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

IIN1RV076a

■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

CAUTION

■When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (→P. 34)

■When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

- If the driver's seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

●Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

- Only put a forward-facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoidable. When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

IIN1RV081

Illustration of a child seated in a car seat inside a vehicle, with no visible text or symbols.

CAUTION

■When installing a child restraint system

• When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
• When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or a sudden braking.
  ● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
  ● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.
  ●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
  ●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

- When using the left side seat for the child restraint system, do not sit in the center seat. Seat belt function may be impaired, such as being positioned overly high or loose-fitting, which may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

JN1RV117a

CAUTION

■ Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking or an accident.

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhale.

CAUTION

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■ Important points while driving

• Keep the back door closed.
• If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

When parking

• If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.
• Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch to indicate that the system has been canceled.

IID1RV023

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

- If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object

- If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in the U.S.A.)

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
FCC ID: MOZRI-42BTY FCC ID: WRKRI-44BTY
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in Canada)

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

XXXXXXXXXXXX XXX IIB1RV001

Instrument cluster

2

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights

and indicators 82

Gauges and meters ..... 87

Multi-information display ..... 89

Warning lights and indicators

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle's various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all warning lights and indicators illuminated.

Instrument cluster

AUTO LED BRAKE ABS SET ARQ LDA IIM2RV045a

The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on the target region.

◆ Center panel

Pro 18.00 PROSOR PROSOR IIM2RV052

◆ Outside rear view mirrors (vehicles with BSM)

IIM2RV053

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle's systems.

*1 BRAKE (U.S.A.) *1 (!) (Canada) *1 Charging system warning light (→P. 504) *1 (MALFUNCTION INDICATOR lamp (→P. 504) *1 (MALFUNCTION INDICATOR lamp (→P. 504) *1 Low engine oil pressure warning light (→P. 504) *1 SRS warning light (→P. 504) *1 ABS warning light (→P. 504) *1 ABS warning light (→P. 504) (Canada) *1 Electric power steering system warning light (→P. 505) *1 Slip indicator (→P. 505) *1 Open door warning light (→P. 507)

Seat belt reminder light ( P. 507)

Automatic High Beam warning light ( P. 505)

(yellow) (if equipped)

Low fuel level warning light ( P. 507)

Low washer fluid warning light ( P. 507)

High engine coolant temperature warning light ( P. 507)

Smart key system indicator ( P. 506, 511)

(if equipped)

Maintenance required reminder light ( P. 508)

Intuitive parking assist indicator ( P. 506, 509)

(U.S.A.)

(if equipped)

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light ( P. 505)

LDA warning lights (→P. 505)

(if equipped)

(if equipped)

Dynamic Torque Control AWD system warning light ( P. 509)

BSM warning light (→P. 505)

(if equipped)

(if equipped)

Cruise control warning light ( P. 505)

Tire pressure warning light ( P. 508)

(yellow)

(if equipped)

*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
^*2 : The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*3: The light comes on to indicate that the intuitive parking assist sensor is dirty or covered with ice.

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle's various systems.

Turn signal indicator ( P. 214)

Security indicator ( P. 77)

Headlight high beam indicator ( P. 219)

"SPORT" indicator ( P. 209)

Automatic High Beam indicator ( P. 221)

"ECO MODE" indicator ( P. 209)

Fog light indicator ( P. 228)

Eco Driving Indicator Light ( P. 167)

(if equipped)

All-wheel drive lock indicator ( P. 259)

(green) (if equipped)

(if equipped)

(green)

"AUTO LSD" indicator (→P. 262)

(if equipped)

Cruise control indicator ( P. 241)

Intuitive parking assist indicator ( P. 253)

Slip indicator ( P. 262)

LDA indicators ( P. 246)

(if equipped)

VSC OFF indicator ( P. 262)

BSM outside rear view mirror indicator ( P. 266)

"TRAC OFF" indicator (→P. 262)

"AIR BAG ON/OFF" indicator (→P. 51)

*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
^*2 : The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illuminate in the following situations:

• When the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) while the BSM main switch is set to ON.
• When the BSM main switch is set to ON while the engine switch is in the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).

If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators will turn off after a few seconds.

If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off, there may be a malfunction with the system. If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if this occurs.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and its components

The engine may be overheating if the high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or turns on. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely.

(→P. 546)

Gauges and meters

① ② ③ P ④ ⑤ IIM2RV057

The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region.

① Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

② Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

③ Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

④ Shift position and shift range

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range ( P. 207)

⑤ Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data ( P. 89)

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turning the dial.

① Brighter
② Darker

Diagram showing car air vent with numbered components and directional arrows indicating airflow direction

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and its components

Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

Multi-information display

Display contents

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data including the current outside air temperature.

●Outside temperature display Indicates the outside temperature. The temperature range that can be displayed is from -40^ ( -40^ ) to 122^ ( 50^ ).
●Engine coolant temperature gauge Displays the engine coolant temperature.
●Shift position and shift range Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range ( P. 207)
- Trip information (→P. 90) Displays odometer, trip meter, driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information.

C H 0.575 400 230 MFS IIM2RV001

Trip information

■Switching the display

Items displayed can be switched by pressing the "DISP" button.

DSP IIM2RV019

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

■Trip meters "A" and "B"

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters "A" and "B" can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Pressing and holding the "DISP" button will reset the trip meter that is currently displayed.

■Current fuel consumption

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

■Average fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

• The function can be reset by pressing the "DISP" button for longer than 1 second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

■Average vehicle speed

Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset.

The function can be reset by pressing the "DISP" button for longer than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

■Driving range

Displays the estimated approximate distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not be updated.
  When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

Eco Driving Indicator Light customization

Eco Driving Indicator Light can be activated or deactivated.

1 While the odometer is being displayed, press and hold the "DISP" button to display the Eco Driving Indicator Light customization screen.

Eco On EcoOFF

2 Press the "DISP" button to set Eco Driving Indicator Light to on or off.
3 Press and hold the "DISP" button to complete the setting.

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The following information data will be reset:

●Trip meters "A" and "B"
●Average fuel consumption
●Average vehicle speed
- Driving range

■ Outside temperature display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

• When stopped, or driving at low speeds (approximately 12 mph [20 km/h] or less)
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

■ When “---°F” is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Customization

Settings can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 579)

NOTICE

■The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

Operation of each component

3

3-1. Key information

Keys...... 96

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart key system 99

Wireless remote control .... 113

Side doors.... 120

Back door.... 125

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats.... 137

Rear seats.... 139

Driving position memory ... 143

Head restraints.... 147

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel 150

Inside rear view mirror ..... 151

Outside rear view mirrors.... 154

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows.... 156

Moon roof.... 159

Keys

The keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system (type A)

① Master keys
Operating the wireless remote control function ( P. 113)
② Valet key
③ Key number plate

① ② ③ IID3RV002

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system (type B)

① Master keys
Operating the wireless remote control function ( P. 113)
② Key number plate

① ② IID3RV001

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

① Electronic keys

• Operating the smart key system (→P. 99)
• Operating the wireless remote control function (→P. 113)

② Mechanical keys
③ Key number plate

graph TD
    A["Device 1"] --> B["Device 2"]
    C["Device 3"] --> D["Mobile Phone"]
    B --> E["Wireless Link 1"]
    D --> F["Wireless Link 2"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system)

To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key. (→P. 539)

Diagram showing a car battery pack and its internal components with arrows indicating assembly (no text or symbols)

If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using a master key (vehicles without a smart key system) or the other key (vehicles with a smart key system) and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

■When riding in an aircraft

When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

NOTICE

■To prevent key damage

• Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
• Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
• Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
• Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.
• Do not disassemble the keys.
• Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
• Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.

- Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart key system)

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related problems (vehicles with a smart key system)

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

■ When an electronic key is lost (vehicles with a smart key system)

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was provided with your vehicle.

Smart key system\*

Function summary

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Diagram illustrating car safety instructions with labeled steps and icons for cleaning, switching, and stop controls.

① Locks and unlocks the side doors ( P. 100)
② Locks and unlocks the back door ( P. 101)
③ Starts the engine ( P. 200)

Operation signals

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

■Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

*: If equipped

Unlocking and locking the doors

▶ Front doors

Grip the driver's door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passenger's door handle to unlock all the doors.*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*: The door unlock settings can be changed. (→P. 105)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors.

IID3RV006

IID3RV007

▶ Back door

Press the unlock button to unlock all the doors.

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.

IID3RV008

Press the lock button to lock all the doors.

IID3RV009

Antenna location and effective range

Antenna location

① Antennas outside the cabin
② Antennas inside the cabin
③ Antenna outside the luggage compartment

② ① ② ① ③ ③ ① ② IID3RV010

■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of either of the outside front door handles and back door opener switch. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

Top-down schematic of a car showing internal components and structural layout (no text or labels)

When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

■ When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle

If the door will not lock even when the topside sensor area is touched, try touching both the topside and underside sensor areas at the same time.

Line drawing of a hand holding a tool, no text or symbols present

■Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures for the warning light that comes on. (IP. 511)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

Alarm Situation	Correction procedure
Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds	An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart key system while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle.	Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.
	An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.	Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.
Interior alarm pings once and exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds.	An attempt was made to lock either front door by opening a door and putting the inside lock button into the lock position, then closing the door with the electronic key still inside the vehicle.	Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.
Interior alarm sounds continuously	The engine switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver's door was open (or the driver's door was opened while the engine switch was in ACCESSORY mode).	Turn the engine switch off and close the driver's door.
	The driver's door was opened while any shift position other than P was selected without turning off the engine switch.	Shift the shift lever to P.

■ Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.

1 Turn the engine switch off.

2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold.

or (if) approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2)

Unlocking function Beep
Holding the driver's door handle unlocks only the driver's door.	Exterior: Beeps 3 timesInterior: Pings once
Holding a passenger's door handle unlocks all the doors.
Holding a door handle unlocks all the doors.	Exterior: Beeps twiceInterior: Pings once

Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.

- In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to unlock the doors.

- The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

- The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

- If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver's door. In this case, take hold of the driver's door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.

Press twice while pressing and

holding . 📄 confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart key system cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.

Illustration of a car door with control buttons and a lightning bolt, emitting sound waves (no text or symbols)

■ Conditions affecting operation

The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: →P. 539)

• When the electronic key battery is depleted
  ●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

• When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
  • Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
  • Metallic wallets or bags

• Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal
  • Media such as CDs and DVDs

• When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

• When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
  • Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

• If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

• When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

■Note for the entry function

●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

- The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

- The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the back door is opened.

- The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch modes are changed.

- Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.

● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.

●The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

- If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

■Note for locking the doors

●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
- When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.
- If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

- Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

- Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (→P. 106)

• If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
  ●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.

Note for the unlocking function

● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
- If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart key system. (→P. 106)
• If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
●The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

■To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

If the smart key system does not operate properly

• Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 539)
  ● Starting the engine: →P. 540

Electronic key battery depletion

●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
- If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops. (→P. 513)
- As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 462)
- The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
- The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

• TVs
- Personal computers
- Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
- Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
- Table lamps
- Induction cookers

■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

→P. 462

Customization

Settings (e. g. smart key system) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 579)

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

●Locking and unlocking the doors:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 113, 539)
● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: →P. 540
● Stopping the engine: →P. 201

■Certification for the smart key system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-13

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

CAUTION

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart key system antennas. (→P. 102)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

- Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

Wireless remote control

Function summary

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle. It also opens and closes the back door.

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

① Locks all the doors
② Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

③ Sounds the alarm (press and hold) (→P. 114)

④ Opens and closes the power back door (press and hold) ^*

Pressing the button while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation.

*: If equipped

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

① Locks all the doors
② Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver's door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

③ Opens and closes the power back door (press and hold)

Pressing the button while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation.

④ Sounds the alarm (press and hold) (→P. 114)

① ② ③ ④ IID3RV014

① ② ③ ④ IID3RV015

Operation signals

Doors:

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

Back door (if equipped):

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash twice to indicate that the back door is opening/closing.

■Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■Panic mode

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

When (1) pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the wireless remote control.

Illustration of a person on a car being struck by lightning, with a small robot nearby (no text or symbols)

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

When (■) pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

Illustration of an electric car with a person standing on top, emitting sound waves from a power strip (no text or symbols)

■Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■ Conditions affecting operation

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the following situations.
●Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves
- When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication device
- When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
- When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
- When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
- When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a personal computer
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
→P. 107

If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system)

Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 539)

■Key battery depletion

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. ( P. 462)
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
→P. 111

■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

→P. 462

■Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

Customization

Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.

■ Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without a smart key system - type A)

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAC

FCC ID: HYQ12BDM

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

■ Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without a smart key system - type B)

TRW Automotive

Automobile Entry/Security Transmitter

Model: 226624-101, 226624-102

FCC ID: GQ4-52T

IC: 1470A-33T

MADE IN U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by TRW Automotive U.S. LLC could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

TRW Automotive

Auto Alarm/Security system Receiver

Model: 230433

FCC ID: GQ4-45R

MADE IN USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-GEN of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicable aux appareils radio exempts de licence.

WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by TRW Automotive U.S. LLC could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

■ Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles with a smart key system)

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA

FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-13

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

▶ For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Side doors

Unlocking and locking the doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the key, entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch.

◆Entry function (if equipped)

→P.99

◆ Wireless remote control

→P.113

Key

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

① Locks all the doors
② Unlocks all the doors

Turning the key unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

IIB3RV001

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. ( P. 539)

Door lock switch

① Locks all the doors
② Unlocks all the doors

② ① IIB3RV002

◆Inside lock buttons

① Locks the door
② Unlocks the door

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handle even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

Diagram of car interior showing two labeled compartments with arrows indicating movement or flow, likely for vehicle control or navigation.

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

1 Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
2 Close the door.

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

① Unlock
② Lock

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.

① ② IIB3RV004

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 579.

Function Operation
Speed linked door locking function (vehicles with a smart key system)	All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Shift position linked door locking function	All doors are automatically locked when shifting the shift lever to position other than P.
Shift position linked door unlocking function	All doors are automatically unlocked when shifting the shift lever to P.
Driver's door linked door unlocking function	All doors are automatically unlocked when driver's door is opened.

■When all the doors are locked with the entry function (vehicles with a smart key system), wireless remote control or key

The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch.

The door lock switch can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the entry function (vehicles with a smart key system), wireless remote control or key.

If a wrong key is used (vehicles with a smart key system)

The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.

Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 579)

CAUTION

■To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
- Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
- Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

Back door

The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened/closed by the following procedures.

Locking and unlocking the back door

■Door lock switch

→P. 121

■Entry function (if equipped)

→P. 101

■Wireless remote control

→P. 113

Opening/closing the back door from inside the vehicle (vehicles with a power back door)

Press and hold the switch to open or close. (A buzzer sounds.)

Pressing the switch while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation.

IIB3RV005

Opening the back door from outside the vehicle

■Back door opener

▶ Vehicles without a power back door
Raise the back door while pressing up the back door opener switch.
▶ Vehicles with a power back door

When the back door is unlocked: Press the back door opener switch.

When the back door is locked: While carrying the electronic key on your person, press the back door opener switch.

Pressing the switch while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation.

IIB3RV006

■ Wireless remote control (vehicles with a power back door)

→P. 113

Power back door switch (vehicles with a power back door)

Pressing the switch closes the back door automatically. (A buzzer sounds.)

Pressing the switch while the back door is opening/closing stops the operation.

IIB3RV007

When closing the back door

Lower the back door using the back door handle.

▶ Vehicles without a power back door

Make sure to push the back door down from the outside to close it.

▶ Vehicles with a power back door

The back door closing assist will activate, and the back door will fully close automatically.

Line drawing of a boat hull with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Canceling the power back door system (vehicles with a power back door)

Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the power back door system.

① Inoperative
② Operative

① PWR DOOR OFF ② PWR DOOR OFF IIB3RV009

Adjusting the open position of the back door (vehicles with a power back door)

The open position of the power back door can be adjusted.

① Open the back door, and adjust it to the desired position.
② Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door until the buzzer sounds 4 times.

■The power back door can be operated when

The power back door is unlocked. (Except for using the back door opener switch.)

■Luggage compartment light

The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened with the luggage compartment light switch on.

① On

② Off

① ② IIB3RV021

■If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be unlocked from the inside.

1 Remove the cover on the back door trim.

Use a cloth to prevent scratches.

IIB3RV010

2 Push the lever for the back door motor.

▶ Vehicles without a power back door

Diagram of a hand using a screwdriver to adjust internal components, no text or symbols present

▶ Vehicles with a power back door

Diagram of a vehicle engine compartment with a red arrow pointing to a component (no text or labels)

■ Jam protection function (vehicles with a power back door)

If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction or stop.

■ When reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a power back door)

To enable the power back door to operate properly, close the back door manually.

■Back door closer (vehicles with a power back door)

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.

■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with a power back door)

While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from suddenly shutting.

■ Back door closing assist (vehicles with a power back door)

If the back door is lowered manually when the back door is stopped at an open position, the back door will fully close automatically.

■ Canceling the adjusted open position of the back door (vehicles with a power back door)

Press and hold the power back door switch on the back door until the buzzer sounds 4 times, pauses momentarily, and then sounds 2 times. The open position is initialized to the fully opened position.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Before driving

● Make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the luggage compartment may be thrown out, causing an accident.
- Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat exhaustion or other injuries.
- Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to operate unexpectedly, or cause the child's hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.

■ Important points while driving

Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

CAUTION

■Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious injury.

- Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door suddenly shut again after it is opened.

- When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

- If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.

- Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

● Vehicles without a power back door: The back door may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the back door on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the back door unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the back door is fully open and secure before using the luggage compartment.

IIB3RV012

- When closing the back door, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.

● Vehicles without a power back door: When closing the back door, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back door handle is used to fully close the back door, it may result in hands or arms being caught.

IIB3RV013

CAUTION

• Do not pull on the back door damper stay (vehicles without a power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with a power back door) to close the back door, and do not hang on the back door damper stay (vehicles without a power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with a power back door).
  Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay (vehicles without a power back door) or back door spindle (vehicles with a power back door) to break, causing an accident.
• Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door. Such additional weight on the back door may cause the back door to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

■Back door closer (vehicles with a power back door)

In the event that the back door is left slightly open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the back door closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the back door, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.

IIB3RV014

- Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power back door system is canceled.

CAUTION

■Power back door (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

• Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
• If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back door is about to open or close.

- If the power back door main switch is turned off while the back door is operating during automatic operation, the back door stops operating. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close suddenly.

- If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the back door may move abruptly.

● On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens automatically. Make sure the back door is fully open and secure.

In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped back door may suddenly open or close, causing an accident.

• When the back door contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) or the engine is started during automatic operation

CAUTION

■Jam protection function (vehicles with a power back door)

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
●The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

NOTICE

■ Back door damper stays (vehicles without a power back door)

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunction.

• Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the damper stay rod.
• Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves or other fabric items.
• Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door.
• Do not place your hand on the damper stay or apply lateral forces to it.

Damper stays IIB3RV015

■Back door spindles (vehicles with a power back door)

The back door is equipped with spindles that hold the back door in place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door spindle, resulting in malfunction.

• Do not attach any foreign objects, such as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the spindle rod.
• Do not touch the spindle rod with gloves or other fabric items.
• Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the back door.
• Do not place your hand on the spindle or apply lateral forces to it.

Spindles IIB3RV020

NOTICE

■ To prevent back door closer malfunction (vehicles with a power back door)

Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operating.

■ To prevent damage to the power back door (if equipped)

● Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would prevent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunction.
- Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is operating.
● Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the power back door will not operate in automatic operation.

Front seats

Adjustment procedure

▶ Manual seat

① ② ③ IIN3RV001

① Seat position adjustment lever

② Seatback angle adjustment lever

▶ Power seat (driver's side only)

③ Vertical height adjustment lever (driver's side only)

IIN3RV003

① Seat position adjustment switch

② Seatback angle adjustment switch

③ Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch

④ Vertical height adjustment switch

⑤ Lumbar support adjustment switch

CAUTION

■When adjusting the seat position

●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
- Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

Seat adjustment

●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position. (manual seat only)

Rear seats

Adjustment procedure

Diagram of a car backseat showing seat arrangement and internal components, with no text or symbols present.

Pull up the lever. Then lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.

When a person sits in the rear center position, align all seatbacks at the same angle.

Folding down the rear seatbacks

■Before folding down the rear seatbacks

1 Stow the rear center seat belt. (→P. 32)

2 Stow the rear seat belt buckles.

Diagram of car seatbelt buckle assembly showing two car seats and one seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols)

3 Lower the head restraint to the lowest position. (→P. 147)

■Folding down rear seatbacks

Pull the seatback angle adjustment lever and fold down the seatback.

IIN3RV009

CAUTION

■When folding the rear seatbacks down

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
• Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
• Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compartment while driving.
• Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.

■Seat adjustment

●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
- Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the rear console box and the rear seat when folding down the rear seatback.

CAUTION

■After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pushing it forward and rearward on the top.
- Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.

NOTICE

■ Stowing the seat belts

The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before you fold down the rear seatbacks.

Driving position memory\*

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat) can be memorized and recalled by pressing a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.

Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.

Entering a position to memory

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the engine switch to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
3 Adjust the driver's seat position.
4 While pressing the "SET" button, press button "1" or "2" until the signal beeps.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

SET 2 1 IIN3RV026

Recalling the memorized position

1 Check that the shift lever is in P.
2 Turn the engine switch to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
3 Press button "1" or "2" to recall the desired position.

2 1 SET IIN3RV027

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation (vehicles with a smart key system)

A desired driving position can be recalled linked with the unlocking of the door.

Setting procedure

Record your driving position to button "1" or "2" before performing the following:

Carrying only the key to which you want to link the driving position, shift the shift lever to P and then close the driver's door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked properly.

1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode and recall the position which you want to link.
2 While pressing the button to recall the position, press the driver's door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.

The driving position is recalled when the driver's door is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control and the driver's door is opened.

IIN3RV052

■Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key for which you want to cancel the linked door unlock operation.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.

1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
2 While pressing the "SET" button, press the driver's door lock switch (either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.

■ When you want to stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following operations:

• Press the "SET" button.
• Press button "1" or "2".
• Adjust the seat using the switches.

- Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine off

Memorized seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver's door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.

■If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.

CAUTION

■Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

Head restraints

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front seats

① Up
Pull the head restraints up.
② Down
Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

① Lock release button ② IIN3RV011

Rear seats

① Up
Pull the head restraints up.
② Down
Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button IIN3RV012a

Folding the head restraints (rear outside seats only)

① To use Lift up the head restraint until it locks.

② To fold Push the head restraint lock release button to fold the head restraint.

① ② Lock release button IIN3RV014

■Removing the head restraints

Front seats

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button IIN3RV015

▶ Rear seats

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button IIN3RV016a

■Installing the head restraints

Front seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button IIN3RV018

▶ Rear seats

Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down while pressing the lock release button.

Lock release button IIN3RV019a

■Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

Side profile illustration of a person wearing a headgear, no text or symbols present

■Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.

CAUTION

■Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

• Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
• Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
  ● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.
• Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Steering wheel

Adjustment procedure

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

1 Hold the steering wheel and press the lever down.

Diagram showing car intake and exhaust behavior with a magnified inset highlighting the intake direction.

2 Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

■Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

Inside rear view mirror

The rear view mirror's position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.

Diagram of a hand holding a pipe with a valve, showing a directional arrow (no text or symbols present)

Anti-glare function

▶ Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by operating the lever.

① Normal position
② Anti-glare position

① ② IIN3RV030

▶ Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare function mode

On/off

When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

Vehicles without a smart key sys- tem:

The function will set to ON mode each time the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

Vehicles with a smart key system:

The function will set to ON mode each time the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to OFF mode. (The indicator also turns off.)

Indicator IIN3RV031

■To prevent sensor error (vehicles with an auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror)

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.

IIN3RV032

CAUTION

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjustment procedure

1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.

① Left
② Right

① ② L R IIN3RV037

2 To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

① Up
② Right
③ Down
④ Left

MIRROR IIN3RV038

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direction of the vehicle's rear.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with no visible text or symbols

■Mirror angle can be adjusted when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The engine switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. ( P. 305)

CAUTION

■ Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
- Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.

■When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

Power windows

Opening and closing procedures

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches. Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

① Closing
② One-touch closing (driver's window only) (if equipped)*
③ Opening
④ One-touch opening (driver's window only) ^*

*: To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.

① ② ③ ④ IIB3RV016

Window lock switch

Press the switch to lock the passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

IIB3RV017

■The power windows can be operated when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

- Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

■Jam protection function (if equipped for driver's window)

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■When the power window does not close normally

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the driver's door.

• Vehicles without a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position.
  ● Vehicles with a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
• If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as explained above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.

1 Press and hold the power window switch. Continue holding the switch for 1 second or more after the window has opened completely.

2 Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue holding the switch for 1 second or more after the window has closed completely.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■ Closing the windows

• Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
• Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
  Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some instances, even death.

■Jam protection function (if equipped for driver's window)

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

Moon roof\*

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.

Opening and closing

① Opens the moon roof*

The moon roof stops slightly before the fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open the moon roof.

② Closes the moon roof*

*: Lightly press either end of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

IIB3RV018

Tilting up and down

① Tilts the moon roof up*

② Tilts the moon roof down*

*: Lightly press either end of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.

IIB3RV019

■The moon roof can be operated when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The engine switch is in the "ON" position.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens.

■To reduce moon roof wind noise

When the moon roof is opened automatically, it will stop slightly before the fully open position. Driving with the moon roof in this position can help reduce wind noise.

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■ Opening the moon roof by small degrees

Quickly press and release the switch.

■Moon roof open reminder function

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to the "LOCK" position and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
The buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened with the moon roof open.

■ When the battery is disconnected or the moon roof does not close normally

The moon roof must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.

1 Turn the engine switch to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).
2 Press and hold the "CLOSE" or "UP" switch until the following movement finishes.

The moon roof will tilt up and pause for 1 second or more.

Then it will tilt down, open and close fully.

3 Release the switch, and then press it in order to ensure proper operation. If the moon roof does not move automatically, perform the procedure again from the beginning.

Customization

Settings (e.g. open reminder function) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 579)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■ Opening the moon roof

• Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
• Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■ Closing the moon roof

• Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
• Do not allow children to operate the moon roof. Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

Driving

4

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle.... 164

Cargo and luggage 176

Vehicle load limits 180

Trailer towing.... 181

Dinghy towing 196

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system)...... 197

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system)...... 200

Automatic transmission..... 207

Turn signal lever.... 214

Parking brake.... 215

Horn 216

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch...... 217

Automatic High Beam ..... 221

Fog light switch 228

Windshield wipers and washer 229

Rear window wiper and washer 234

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap.... 237

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Cruise control.... 241

LDA (Lane Departure Alert).... 245

Intuitive parking assist..... 253

All-wheel drive lock switch (AWD models) ..... 259

Driving assist systems ..... 260

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)...... 266

• The Blind Spot Monitor function.... 270

• The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.... 273

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips ...... 276

Utility vehicle precautions 281

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the engine

→P. 197, 200

Driving

1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 207)
2 Release the parking brake. ( P. 215)
3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. ( P. 207)

Parking the vehicle

1 With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
2 Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 207)
3 Set the parking brake. (→P. 215)
4 Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position to stop the engine. Vehicles with a smart key system: Press the engine switch to stop the engine.
5 Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person. If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Starting off on a steep uphill

1 Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
3 Release the parking brake.

- Driving in the rain

• Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
• Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
  ●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

■Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
●When the accelerator pedal is released
- When the brake pedal is depressed while sport mode is selected

■Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.

●For the first 600 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down operation.

■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (→P. 563)

Eco Driving Indicator

Suggests Zone of Eco driving and Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.

① Eco Driving Indicator Light

During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on.

When the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.

Eco Driving Indicator Light availability can be customized. The default setting is on. (→P. 92)

ECO ① ③ ECO ② ④ IIE4RV074

② Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display

Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display availability can be customized at your Toyota dealer. The default setting is off.

③ Zone of Eco driving

④ Eco driving ratio based on acceleration

If the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driving, the right side of Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display blinks.

Eco Driving Indicator will not operate in the following conditions:

●The shift lever is anything other than D.

● Neither normal mode nor Eco drive mode is selected. (→P. 209)

●The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■When driving the vehicle

- Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

- Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.

- When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

- Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

- Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

- Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When driving the vehicle

During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 493
- Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( P. 208)
- Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.
- Do not drive the vehicle off-road.
This is not an AWD vehicle designed for off-road driving. Proceed with all due caution if it becomes unavoidable to drive off-road.
- Do not drive across river crossings or through other bodies of water.
This may cause electric/electronic components to short circuit, damage the engine or cause other serious damage to the vehicle.
- Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.

■When shifting the shift lever

• Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
  Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
• Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
  Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
• Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
  Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
• Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
  Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
• Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
• Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

The rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

■When the vehicle is stopped

• Do not race the engine.
  If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
• In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
• If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
  ●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
  Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

CAUTION

■When the vehicle is parked

• Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.
  Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.
• Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
• Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
• Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
  ●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
  Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
• Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
  Doing so may cause burns.

CAUTION

■When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

When braking

• When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
  Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
• If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
  In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
• Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
  Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
  ●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.
  If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

■If the vehicle becomes stuck (AWD models)

Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.

NOTICE

■When driving the vehicle

• Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
• Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■When parking the vehicle

Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

• Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
• When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

• It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
  ●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
  ●The vehicle will lean abnormally.
  Information on what to do in case of a flat tire ( P. 519)

NOTICE

■When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:

Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:

●Brake function
Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transaxle, transfer (AWD models), rear differential (AWD models), etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft (AWD models), bearings and suspension joints (where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —

(1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P. 180)

Calculation formula for your vehicle

① Cargo capacity
② Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) ( P. 552)

graph TD
    A["Human Group 1"] --> B["Control Unit 1"]
    C["Human Group 2"] --> D["Control Unit 2"]
    B --> E["Feedback Loop 1"]
    D --> F["Feedback Loop 2"]
    E --> G["Output"]
    F --> G["Output"]

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B^2 lb. (kg) - A ^1 lb. (kg) = C ^*3 lb. (kg)

*1:A = Weight of people
^*2 :B = Total load capacity
*3:C = Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D ^4 lb. (kg) = E ^5 lb. (kg)

*4:D = Additional weight of people
*5:E = Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

CAUTION

■ Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:

●Receptacles containing gasoline
Aerosol cans

■Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver's vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.

●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.
- Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seat-backs.
- Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover (if equipped)
• On the instrument panel

• On the dashboard

• Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

• When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be place directly behind the front seats.
  ●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

CAUTION

■ Capacity and distribution

• Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
  Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

■ When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped)

Observe the following precautions:

• Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear axles.
• If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width. (→P. 552)
  ●Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.
• Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of gravity of the vehicle higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury.
• If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
• Do not exceed 101.9 lb. (46.2 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

■ When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped)

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof (if equipped).

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, TWR (Trailer Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

◆ Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P. 552

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

◆Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): →P. 185, 552

TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

■ Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. ( P. 454)

CAUTION

■Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving habits.

Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with your trailer's characteristics and operating conditions.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional requirements such as a towing kit, etc.

Towing related terms

■GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross combination weight. The gross combination weight is the sum of the total vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the weight of the trailer being towed (including the cargo in the trailer).

Line drawing of a car on a lift with a speedometer, no text or symbols present

■GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross vehicle weight. The gross vehicle weight is the total weight of the vehicle. When towing a trailer, it is the sum of the vehicle weight (including the occupants, cargo and any optional equipment installed on the vehicle) and the tongue weight.

Line drawing of a car on a platform with a speedometer and a truck nearby (no text or symbols)

■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross axle weight. The gross axle weight is the load placed on each axle (front and rear).

Front GAWR Rear GAWR IIE4RV004

■TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross trailer weight. The gross trailer weight is the sum of the trailer weight and the weight of the cargo in the trailer.

TWR is calculated assuming base vehicle with one driver, one front passenger, hitch and hitch systems (if required).

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.

(With brakes) IIE4RV005

■Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

The trailer weight rating for towing a trailer without a trailer service brake system.

(Without brakes) IIE4RV006

■ Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer hitch ball. (→P. 186)

Simple line drawing of a mechanical device with a dial and lever (no text or symbols)

Weight limits

●The gross trailer weight must never exceed 1500 lb. (680 kg).
●The gross combination weight must never exceed the GCWR described below.

2WD models: 5985 lb. (2715 kg)

AWD models: 6100 lb. (2765 kg)

●The gross vehicle weight must never exceed the GVWR indicated on the Certification Label.
●The gross axle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR indicated on the Certification Label.

- If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are required.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, door, and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.

GCWR\*

2WD models: 5985 lb. (2715 kg)

AWD models: 6100 lb. (2765 kg)

TWR\*

1500 lb. (680 kg)

■Unbraked TWR\*

1000 lb. (450 kg)

Trailer Tongue Weight

● A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers or towing as described below.
●To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded by referring to the following instructions.

- Tongue Weight

The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue weight is 9% to 11%.

(Tongue weight / Gross trailer weight x 100 = 9% to 11%)

① Gross trailer weight
② Tongue weight

① ② IIE4RV009

The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be measured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

• If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
  ●Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your vehicle.
  ●Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
  ●Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
• Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.

Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball

① Weight carrying ball position: 45.2 in. (1147 mm)
② Hitch receiver pin hole position: 38.9 in. (988 mm)

① ② IIE4RV011

Connecting trailer lights

Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation may cause damage to the vehicle's lights. Please take care to comply with your state's laws when installing trailer lights.

Trailer towing tips

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:

●Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the posted towing speed limit.
●Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner's manual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of control.
- Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle-trailer combination.
●Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.

●As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
- Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jack-knifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
●Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
●Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making turn.
●Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal turning radius.
- Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surfaces, etc. Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
●Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
- To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in D. If in the S mode, the transmission shift range position must be in 4 or lower.
- Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

- Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85^ [30 °C]) when driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.

(→P. 546)

●Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle's and the trailer's wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the following:

1 Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2 Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle's and trailer's wheels.
3 When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4 Apply the parking brake firmly.
5 Shift into P and turn off the engine.

●When restarting after parking on a slope:

1 With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed.
2 Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
3 Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
4 Have someone retrieve the blocks.

■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup must be the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

IIE4RV012

① Coupler
② Trailer ball

① ② IIE4RV013

Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:

• Ensure that your vehicle's tires are properly inflated. (→P. 561)
• Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recommendation.
  ● All trailer lights work as required by law.
  ● All lights work each time you connect them.
  ● The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
  ●The trailer is level when it is hitched.

Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

●The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
●The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

■Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota recommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).

After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than 45 mph (72 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.

Maintenance

• If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
• Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.

If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.

- If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
  Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce speed.
  Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer should stabilize.

●After the trailer swaying has stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.

Make sure the load has not shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.

- Check the load in the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination. Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.

CAUTION

■Trailer towing precautions

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the trailer's characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer.

■To avoid accident or injury

●Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
- Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close to the trailer axle as possible.
- Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner's manual, whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of which you experience the instability.
- Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.

CAUTION

• Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
• Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
• Do not use cruise control when towing.
• Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.
  ● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
• Do not tow a trailer when the compact spare tire is installed on your vehicle.

Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.

CAUTION

■When towing a trailer

Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

• If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
• Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's braking effectiveness.
  ● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.

NOTICE

■When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

■ Do not directly splice trailer lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunction.

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground.

IIE4RV014

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and Dynamic Torque Control AWD system (AWD models)

2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

IIE4RV015

AWD models: Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission and Dynamic Torque Control AWD system.

IIE4RV016

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system)

Starting the engine

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.
4 Turn the engine switch to the "START" position to start the engine.

Changing the engine switch positions

① “LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed. (The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)

② “ACC”
Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

③ "ON"
All electrical components can be used.

④ "START"
For starting the engine.

1 2 3 4 IIE4RV075

■Turning the key from "ACC" to "LOCK"

① Shift the shift lever to P.

2 Push in the key and turn it to the "LOCK" position.

FESH IIE4RV076

■If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 77) Contact your Toyota dealer.

■When the steering lock cannot be released

When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the "LOCK" position. To free it, turn the key while turning the steering wheel slightly left and right.

IIE4RV077

■Key reminder function

A buzzer sounds if the driver's door is opened while the engine switch is in the "LOCK" or "ACC" position to remind you to remove the key.

CAUTION

■When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Caution when driving

Do not turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position while driving. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the "ACC" position to stop the engine. An accident may result if the engine is stopped while driving. (→P. 493)

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in the "ACC" or "ON" position for long periods of time without the engine running.

■When starting the engine

• Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring system.
• Do not race a cold engine.
• If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system)

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.

Starting the engine

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Check that the shift lever is set in P.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal.

The smart key system indicator light (green) will turn on. If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be started.

4 Press the engine switch.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.

The engine can be started from any engine switch mode.

ENGINE START STOP IIE4RV079

Stopping the engine

1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Set the parking brake. (→P. 215)
4 Press the engine switch.
5 Release the brake pedal and check that the smart key system indicator light (green) is off.

Changing engine switch modes

Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off*

The emergency flashers can be used.

The smart key system indicator light (green) off.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

The smart key system indicator light (green) flashes slowly.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

The smart key system indicator light (green) flashes slowly.

*: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the engine switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

ENGINE START STOP IIE4RV081

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P

If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

1 Check that the parking brake is set.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Check that the smart key system indicator light (green) flashes slowly and then press the engine switch once.
4 Check that the smart key system indicator light (green) is off.

■Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

Electronic key battery depletion

→P. 111

■Conditions affecting operation

→P. 107

Notes for the entry function

→P. 108

■If the engine does not start

● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 77) Contact your Toyota dealer.
●The steering lock may not have been canceled.

Steering lock

After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

■When the steering lock cannot be released

The smart key system indicator light (green) will flash quickly.

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the engine switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

IIE4RV083

■Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from running the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

■ When the smart key system indicator light flashes in yellow

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■If the electronic key battery is depleted

→P. 462

■Operation of the engine switch

When operating the engine switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the engine switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting

→P. 539

CAUTION

■When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Caution while driving

If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■Stopping the engine in an emergency

If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (→P. 493)

However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

• Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
• If the smart key system indicator light (green) is illuminated, the engine switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always check that the engine switch is off.
• Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.

■When starting the engine

• Do not race a cold engine.
• If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately.

■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch

If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

Automatic transmission

Shifting the shift lever

P R N + S - D - IE4RV017

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

While the engine switch is in the "ON" position, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Shift position purpose

Shift position Objective or function
P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving*	1
S S mode driving*	^2 (→P. 210)

*1: Shifting the shift lever to D allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions.

Setting the shift lever to D is recommended for normal driving.

^*2 : Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear ranges, controls engine braking force, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.

Selecting the driving mode

The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions.

■ Eco drive mode

Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips that involve frequent accelerating.

Press the "ECO MODE" button to select Eco drive mode.

The "ECO MODE" indicator comes on.

Press the button again to cancel Eco drive mode.

ECO MODE ECO MODE IIE4RV019

■ Sport mode

Use sport mode for powerful acceleration and driving in mountainous regions.

Press the "SPORT" button to select sport mode.

The "SPORT" indicator comes on.

Press the button again to cancel sport mode.

SPORT SPORT IIE4RV020

Selecting shift ranges in the S position

To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can be selected by operating the shift lever, allowing you to drive in the shift range of your choosing. The shift range can be selected by the shift lever.

① Upshifting
② Downshifting

The selected shift range, from 1 to 6, will be displayed in the meter.

The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to 5 or 4 according to vehicle speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in D. (→P. 213)

S ① ② IIE4RV022

■ Shift ranges and their functions

●Automatically selecting shift ranges between 1 and 6 according to vehicle speed and driving conditions. But the gear is limited according to selected range.
●You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.
● A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.

S mode

• When the shift range is 4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to 6.
  ●To prevent the engine from over-revving, upshifting may automatically occur.
  ●To protect the automatic transmission, a higher shift range may automatically selected when the fluid temperature is high.

■Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed ^ of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency ( P. 293, 302). To improve air conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed ^ or turn off Eco drive mode.

*: Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system only

■Deactivation of the driving mode

• Eco drive mode will not be canceled until the "ECO MODE" button is pressed, even if the engine is turned off after driving in Eco drive mode.
• Sport mode will be canceled if the engine is turned off after driving in sport mode.

■When driving with cruise control activated

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not activate because cruise control will not be canceled.

● While driving in S mode, downshifting to 5 or 4. (→P. 210)
- When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D. (→P. 209)

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

→P. 538

If the “S” indicator does not come on or the “D” indicator is displayed even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever is in D.)

If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light comes on (AWD models only)

If the automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light comes on while driving, make sure to return to D position driving and reduce speed by easing off the accelerator pedal. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to P and let the engine idle until the warning light goes out.

When the warning light goes out, the vehicle can be driven again.

If the warning light does not go out after waiting a while, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

A/T OIL TEMP IE4RV119

AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in D. (Shifting the shift lever to S cancels the function.)

CAUTION

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.

Turn signal lever

Operating instructions

① Right turn
② Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
③ Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
④ Left turn

Diagram illustrating car head adjustment and navigation steps with labeled arrows and directional arrows for motion control.

■Turn signals can be operated when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction.

Customization

The setting of the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.

① Sets the parking brake
Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.
② Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.

BRAKE (①) U.S.A. Canada ① ② IIB4RV027

■Usage in winter time

→P.277

NOTICE

Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

Horn

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no text or symbols visible)

■After adjusting the steering wheel

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

(→P. 150)

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

▶ Type A

① The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on.
② The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
③ AUTO The headlights and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically. (When the engine switch is in the "ON" position [vehicles without a smart key system] or IGNITION ON mode [vehicles with a smart key system])

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and dashboard adjustment, with numbered arrows indicating motion direction.

④ DRL OFF Off (U.S.A.)

○ The daytime running (Canada) lights turn on.

▶ Type B

① The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on.
② The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
③ DRL The daytime running lights turn on.
④ OFF Off

Diagram illustrating car interior and dashboard control with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or adjustment.

▶ Type C

① The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, daytime running lights and instrument panel lights turn on.
② The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
③ o The daytime running lights turn on.

IIB4RV095

Turning on the high beam headlights

① With the headlights on, push the lever away from you to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.

② Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

① ② ID IIB4RV030

■Daytime running light system

● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
- Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunction.

Line drawing of a car's front wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

■Automatic light off system

When the light switch is in AUTO: The lights turn off 30 seconds after the engine switch is turned to the "LOCK" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key system) and a door is opened and all of the doors are closed. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed while all the doors are locked.)

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), or turn the light switch off, then turn it to 30 to .

When the light switch is in the position other than AUTO: If any of the doors is kept open and the engine switch is in the "LOCK" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key system), the lights automatically turn off after 20 minutes.

Light reminder buzzer

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to the "LOCK" position, the key is removed and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off and the driver's door is opened while the lights are turned on.

Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 579)

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Automatic High Beam\*

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles, etc., and automatically turns high beam on or off as necessary.

Activating the Automatic High Beam system

Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in AU position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will come on when the headlights are turned on automatically to indicate that the system is active.

AUTO IIB4RV045

*: If equipped

High beam automatic turning on or off conditions

When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned on:

●Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).
●The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
●There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or tail lights turned on.
●There are few streetlights on the road ahead.

If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be automatically turned off:

●Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
●The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
●Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights turned on.
●There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

Turning the high beam on/off manually

■Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to original position.

Diagram showing a hand operating a vehicle's steering wheel, with a magnified inset highlighting the left side (no text or symbols present)

■Switching to high beam

Turn the light switch to position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.

IIB4RV047

4

Driving

■The Automatic High Beam can be operated when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The engine switch is in the "ON" position.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■Camera sensor detection information

●High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another
• When oncoming or preceding vehicles are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees
• When oncoming vehicles appear from the faraway lane on wide road
• When oncoming or preceding vehicles have no lights

●High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog lights without using the headlights is detected.

●House lights, street lights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause the high beam to turn off.

●The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high beam on or off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and preceding vehicles
• The movement and direction of oncoming and preceding vehicles
• When a oncoming or preceding vehicle only has operational lights on one side
• When a oncoming or preceding vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)
  • The number of passengers and amount of luggage

●High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver.

- In the situations below, the system may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness levels, and may flash or expose nearby pedestrians to the high beam. Therefore, you should consider turning the high beams on or off manually rather than relying on the Automatic High Beam system.

• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)
- The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.
- The windshield is cracked or damaged.
• The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.
- Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.
- Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color, or are not aimed properly.
- When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.
- When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.).
- When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.
- There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.
- The vehicle's headlights are damaged or dirty.
- The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.
- The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnormal manner.
- The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

■Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

1 Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position while the following conditions are met.
Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.
• The headlight switch is in AUTO
- The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.
2 Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the "ON" position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
3 Within 5 seconds after 2 repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 9 times, then leave the lever in high beam position.

Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.

If the Automatic High Beam indicator turns to yellow...

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.

Customization

The Automatic High Beam can be turned off.

■Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if necessary.

NOTICE

Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system

Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly.

• Do not touch the camera sensor.
• Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
• Do not disassemble the camera sensor.

- Do not spill liquid onto the camera sensor.

- Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the camera sensor or the area of windshield near the camera sensor.

- Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor will mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of other vehicles, etc.

- Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the camera sensor.

- Do not overload the vehicle.

- Do not modify the vehicle.

- Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield. Contact your Toyota dealer.

- Do not replace headlights with non-genuine headlights. Contact your Toyota dealer.

Line drawing of a car interior showing a seatbelt and dashboard, with no visible text or symbols

Fog light switch\*

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain and fog.

① OFF (U.S.A.) or Canada) Turns the fog lights off
②知 Turns the fog lights on

E0 IIB4RV034

■Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

*: If equipped

Windshield wipers and washer

Operating the wiper lever

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.

▶ Intermittent windshield wipers (for the U.S.A.)

If equipped, when intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, wiper intervals can be also adjusted.

① INT Intermittent wiper operation
② LO Low speed wiper operation
③ HI High speed wiper operation
④ MIST Temporary operation

Diagram illustrating car interior and rear valve mechanism with labeled parts and directional arrows

⑤ Increases the intermittent wind-shield wiper frequency (if equipped)
⑥ Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency (if equipped)
⑦ Washer/wiper dual operation The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

⑤ ⑥ IIB4RV002

⑦ IIB4RV003

▶ Intermittent windshield wipers (for Canada)

If equipped, when intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, wiper intervals can be also adjusted.

① Intermittent wiper operation
② ▼ Low speed wiper operation
③ ▼ High speed wiper operation
④ △ Temporary operation

Diagram illustrating car steering wheel and hand valve mechanism with numbered instructions for each step

⑤ Increases the intermittent wind-shield wiper frequency (if equipped)
⑥ Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency (if equipped)
⑦ Washer/wiper dual operation The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

⑤ ⑥ IIB4RV005

⑦ IIB4RV006

■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir.

CAUTION

■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

■When a nozzle becomes blocked

In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the wipers on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

Rear window wiper and washer

Turning the end of the lever turns on the rear window wiper and washer.

For the U.S.A.

① INT Intermittent window wiper operation
② ON Normal window wiper operation

MIST OFF INT LO HB INT ON INT OFF REAR 2 1 IIB4RV011

③ Washer/wiper dual operation

IIB4RV023

For Canada

① --- Intermittent window wiper operation
② — Normal window wiper operation

IIB4RV012

③ Washer/wiper dual operation

③ IIB4RV024

4

Driving

■ The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■If no washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzle is not blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

■When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle

• Close all the doors and windows, and turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key system).
• Confirm the type of fuel.

Fuel type

Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or higher)

CAUTION

■When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
- Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.
- Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
- Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
- Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

• Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
• Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
• Do not top off the fuel tank.

NOTICE

Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling. Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

Opening the fuel tank cap

1 Pull up the opener to open the fuel filler door.

IIB4RV014

2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

IIB4RV015a

3 Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a motor or gear mechanism with a pink arrow indicating motion direction (no text or symbols present)

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a rotating arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

■When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

Cruise control

Summary of functions

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

① Indicators
② Cruise control switch

① SET ② IIB4RV018

Setting the vehicle speed

1 Press the "ON-OFF" button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

IIB4RV019

2 Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.

"SET" indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

SET IIB4RV020

Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

① Increases the speed
② Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

① +RES (2) SET ② IIB4RV021

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the lever is released.

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

① Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also canceled when the brakes are applied.

② Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

IIB4RV022 ① ② + REE (B) BET

■ Cruise control can be set when

●The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

■Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations.

●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●VSC is activated.

If the cruise control indicator light comes on in yellow

Press the "ON-OFF" button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the "ON-OFF" button when not in use.

■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
- When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ^*

Summary of function

While driving on a road that has lane markers, this system recognizes the lane markers using a camera as a sensor to alert the driver when the vehicle deviates from its lane.

If the system judges that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, it alerts the driver using beeping and indications on the instrument cluster.

Camera sensor

Line drawing of a car interior showing the dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

4

Driving

*: If equipped

Turning the LDA system on

Press the "LDA" switch to activate the system.

LDA indicator will come on.

Press the switch again to turn the LDA system off.

The LDA system will remain on or off even if the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).

LDA LDA IIB4RV035

Operating conditions

●When the vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more
- When the lane width is more than approximately 8.2 ft. (2.5 m)
- When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of more than approximately 328 ft. (100 m)

Indication on the instrument cluster

When the LDA system is on, the lane lines are shown.

① The indicators of the lane lines come on in green when the right and left lane markers are recognized.
② The indicator of the recognized side lane line comes on in green when the right or left lane marker is recognized.
③ The indicator of the lane line on the side the vehicle deviates from will flash when the vehicle deviates from the lane.
④ The indicators of the lane lines turn off when no lane marker is recognized or the LDA system is temporarily canceled.

① LDA ② LDA or LDA ③ LDA or LDA ④ LDA IIB4RV036

■Temporary cancelation of the LDA system

If any of the following occurs, the LDA system will be temporarily canceled. The function will resume after the necessary operating conditions have returned.

●The vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LDA system.
●The turn signal lever is operated.
- When the lane lines cannot be recognized while driving.
- When the lane departure warning function is activated.

The lane departure warning function will not operate again for a several seconds after it has been activated, even if the vehicle leaves the lane again.

■The lane departure warning

It may be difficult to hear the sensory warning depending on the road conditions.

■After the vehicle has been parked in the sun

The LDA system may not be available and the LDA indicator comes on in yellow for a while after driving has started.

When the temperature in the cabin decreases and the temperature around the camera sensor ( P. 245) becomes suitable for its operation, the functions will begin to operate.

■ Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly

In the following conditions, the LDA system may not operate, or it may not be possible to ensure adequate performance. Also, the camera sensor may be unable to recognize lane markers causing the lane departure warning function to operate incorrectly. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.

• When driving through an area with no lane markers, such as a tollbooth, a crossing or before a ticket checkpoint
  ●When driving on a sharp curve
• When lane markers are extremely narrow or extremely wide
• When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or improper tire inflation pressure
• When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short
• When the lane markers are yellow (these may be more difficult for the system to recognize compared to white markers.)
• When the lane markers are broken, "Botts' dots", "Raised pavement marker" or stones
• When the lane markers are on a curb etc.

• When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.

• When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a shadow covers the lane markers

• When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete
• When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light
• When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the entrance to or exit from a tunnel
• When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the camera lens
• When driving on roads that are branching or merging
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing water, etc.
• When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement
• When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or when the headlights are misaligned
• When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven
• When driving on rough or unpaved roads

■When changing the tires

Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable.

■Warning indicators for LDA system

Warning indicators are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (→P. 505)

CAUTION

■Before using the LDA system

Do not rely solely on the LDA system. The LDA system does not drive the vehicle automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the driver must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surroundings, for operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving safely. Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an accident.

■To avoid operating the LDA by mistake

Switch the LDA system off using the "LDA" switch when not in use.

■Situations unsuitable for LDA system

Do not use LDA system in any of the following situations. Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.

• When driving with tire chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment
• When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinterpreted as lane markers (such as guardrails, curb, reflector posts, etc.)
  ●When driving on snowy roads
• When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, sand, dirt, etc.
• When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains of old lane markers are still visible on the road
• When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving in a temporary lane

NOTICE

■ To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LDA system

• Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights.
• Do not modify the suspension or replace it with non-genuine parts.
• Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).
• If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Camera sensor (→P. 245)

Observe the following to ensure that the LDA system functions correctly.

• Keep the windshield clean at all times.
  Performance could be affected if the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, condensation or ice are adhering to the windshield.

- Do not attach a sticker or other items to the windshield near the camera sensor.

IIB4RV038

• Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
• Do not install an antenna in front of the camera lens.
• If the windshield is fogged up, use the windshield defogger to remove fog from the windshield.
  When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images.

NOTICE

• Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty.
  When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to get any glass cleaner etc. on the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
  For lens repair, contact your Toyota dealer.
• Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it. The direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted.
• Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not disassemble the camera sensor.
• Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield.
  Contact your Toyota dealer.

Intuitive parking assist\*

The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the indicator and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.

■Types of sensors

① Rear corner sensors
② Rear center sensors

IID4RV001 ① ② ①

■Intuitive parking assist switch

Turns intuitive parking assist on/off

When on, the indicator light comes on to inform the driver that the system is operational.

P IID4RV002

*: If equipped

The indicator and buzzer

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are indicated and the buzzer sounds.

■Intuitive parking assist indicator

① Vehicle indicator
② Rear corner indicators
③ Rear center indicator

① ② ③ IID4RV003

■Sensor operation and distance to an obstacle

The system operates when the vehicle approaches an obstacle, as shown by the following table.

When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.

▶ Rear corner sensors

Approximate distance to obstacle Indicator and buzzer

1.6 ft. (50 cm) to 1.3 ft. (40 cm) Intermittent

1.3 ft. (40 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm) Fast intermittent

Less than 1.0 ft. (30 cm) Continuously

▶ Rear center sensors

Approximate distance to obstacle Indicator and buzzer

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm) Intermittent

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm) Fast intermittent

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm) Very fast intermittent

Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm) Continuously

■Detection range of the sensors

① Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
② Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors may not be able to detect obstacles that are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object etc.

IID4RV004

4

Driving

■Intuitive parking assist can be operated when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the "ON" position and the shift lever is in R.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the shift lever is in R.

■Sensor detection information

• The sensor's detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle's rear bumper.
  ● Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.)

• A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
• A sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or radio antenna.
• A bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or right-angled curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing. In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are.

●The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following obstacles:

• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves

- Sharply-angled objects

- Low obstacles

- Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

●The following situations may occur during use:

• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and indicator. Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor's detection areas before the indicator comes on and the warning beep sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for collision when approached, even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise of air conditioning system.

■When the system malfunctions

●The indicator for the malfunctioning sensor turns on and the vehicle indicator turns off while the buzzer sounds for approximately 7 seconds.

If the corner and center indicators turn on and remain on after that, first check the status of the sensor. If the indicators stay on even though there is no mud, ice or snow on the sensor, the sensor may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

●The indicator for the malfunctioning sensor flashes and the vehicle indicator turns off while the buzzer sounds for approximately 7 seconds.

If the corner and center indicators flash after that, the sensor may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

■Certification (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

CAUTION

■Caution when using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.

● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
The sensors' detection areas and reaction times are limited. When reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle's speed.
- Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.

NOTICE

■When using intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

● A beep does not sound when you turn the main switch on.
●The corner and center indicators flash, and a beep sounds when no obstacles are detected.
- If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.
- If the bumper collides with something.
- If the corner and center indicators show continuously without a beep.
- If a indicator error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area. Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

All-wheel drive lock switch (AWD models)

All-wheel drive lock mode can be used when a large amount of drive power needs to be applied to all the wheels, such as when the vehicle gets stuck in mud and you need to free it.

Press the switch.

The torque of the engine is distributed to the rear wheels to the maximum extent possible in accordance with driving conditions.

Pressing the switch again cancels all-wheel drive lock mode and returns the Dynamic Torque Control AWD system to normal mode. (→P. 261)

IIE4RV088

■ All-wheel drive lock mode can be operated when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The engine switch is in the "ON" position.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■ All-wheel drive lock mode

● All-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the brakes are applied to ensure the ABS and VSC systems operate effectively.
● All-wheel drive lock mode is canceled when the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h).

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

◆ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

◆TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads

♦ AUTO LSD function (2WD models)

The AUTO LSD function is activated when the system is in TRAC off mode. It operates when one of the drive wheels is spinning, such as when the wheel is spinning freely on ice or mud. The system applies the brakes to the spinning wheel and transfers some of the torque to the other wheel to secure drive power.

◆ Dynamic Torque Control AWD system (AWD models)

Automatically switches from front-wheel drive to all-wheel drive (AWD) according to the driving conditions, helping to ensure reliable handling and stability. Examples of conditions where the system will switch to AWD are when cornering, going uphill, starting off or accelerating, and when the road surface is slippery due to snow, rain, etc.

◆EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC/VSC systems are operating.

IIB4RV040a

Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release

Press again to turn the system back on.

2WD models:

The "AUTO LSD" and VSC OFF indicator lights will come on.

AUTO LSD OFF IIB4RV043a

AWD models:

The "TRAC OFF" indicator light will come on.

TRAC OFF IIB4RV091

■Turning off both TRAC/VSC systems

To turn the TRAC/VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

2WD models:

The VSC OFF indicator light will come on.

AWD models:

The "TRAC OFF" and VSC OFF indicator lights will come on.

Press again to turn the systems back on.

When the “AUTO LSD” indicator light flashes even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed (2WD models)

TRAC and AUTO LSD cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.

- When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed (AWD models)

TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.

■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems

● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

EPS operation sound

When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems

After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically reactivated in the following situations:

• When the engine switch is turned to the "LOCK" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key system).
• If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases

If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic reactivation will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system

The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.

CAUTION

■The ABS does not operate effectively when

●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:

• When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
  ●When driving with tire chains
  ●When driving over bumps in the road
• When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

■TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

■When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

CAUTION

■Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.

The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.

Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■Handling of tires and the suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)\*

Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions;

●The Blind Spot Monitor function

Assists the driver in making the decision when changing lanes

●The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

Assists the driver when backing up

These functions use same sensors.

① ② ③ IID4RV005

① BSM main switch

Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the switch's indicator illuminates and the buzzer sounds. Common switch for Blind Spot Monitor function and Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.

*: If equipped

② Outside rear view mirror indicators

Blind Spot Monitor function:

When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator comes on while the turn signal lever is not operated and the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes while the turn signal lever is operated.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function:

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, the outside rear view mirror indicators flash.

③ Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer (Rear Cross Traffic Alert function only)

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer sounds from behind the left-hand rear seat.

■The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility

When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■Rear Cross Traffic Alert buzzer hearing

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may be difficult to hear over loud noises such as high audio volume.

■ When there is a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor system

If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, the BSM warning light will come on: (→P. 505)

●There is a malfunction with the sensors
●The sensors have become dirty
●The outside temperature is extremely high or low
●The sensor voltage has become abnormal

■Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: OAYSRR2A

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

▶ For vehicles sold in Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05-24.25 GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

CAUTION

■Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor system can function correctly.

- Keep the sensor and its surrounding area on the bumper clean at all times.

Line drawing of a car rear view from front and side (no text or symbols)

• Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact. If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by your Toyota dealer.
• Do not disassemble the sensor.
• Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
  ● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
• Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.

The Blind Spot Monitor function

The Blind Spot Monitor function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicles existence via the outside rear view mirror indicator.

The Blind Spot Monitor function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of the detection area extends to:

① Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle is not in the detection area
② Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
③ Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

① ② ③ IID4RV006

CAUTION

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The Blind Spot Monitor function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor function. The function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reliance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

■The Blind Spot Monitor function is operational when

●The BSM main switch is set to on
● Vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■The Blind Spot Monitor function will detect a vehicle when

●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
●Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function will not detect a vehicle

The Blind Spot Monitor function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc. *
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects *
●Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
● Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor function may not function correctly

●The Blind Spot Monitor function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
• When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area
• Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on
• When towing a trailer

- Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase under the following conditions:

• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle enters the detection area
• When items such as a bicycle carrier are installed on the rear of the vehicle

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert functions when your vehicle is in reverse. It can detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left rear of the vehicle. It uses radar sensors to alert the driver of the other vehicle's existence through flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.

graph TD
    A["①"] --> B["②"]
    B --> C["②"]
    C --> D["①"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

① Approaching vehicles Detection areas

CAUTION

■ Cautions regarding the use of the system

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is only an assist and is not a replacement for careful driving. Driver must be careful when backing up, even when using Rear Cross Traffic Alert function. The driver's own visual confirmation of behind you and your vehicle is necessary and be sure there are no pedestrians, other vehicles etc. before backing up. Failure to do so could cause death or serious injury.

According to conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver's own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function detection areas

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

IID4RV008 ①

To give the driver a more consistent time to react, the buzzer can alert for faster vehicles from farther away.

Example:

Approaching vehicle Speed	1 Approximate alert distance
Fast 18 mph (28 km/h) 65 ft. (20 m)
Slow 5 mph (8 km/h) 18 ft. (5.5 m)

■ The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when

●The BSM main switch is set to on.
●The shift lever is in R.
● Vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● Approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h).

■ Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects.

● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc. *
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects *
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*
- Vehicles backing up in the parking space next to your vehicle*

*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function correctly

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following conditions:

• When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
  ● During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach continuously

●Shallow angle parking

- When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

- When parking on a steep incline, such as hills, a dip in the road etc.

●Directly after the BSM main switch is set to on

●Directly after the engine is started with the BSM main switch on

- When towing a trailer

● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect because of obstacles

IID4RV009

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Preparation for winter

- Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid

● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.

●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the front tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

• Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
  ●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
• Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
• Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain:

① 0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
② 0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
③ 1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain:
④ 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
⑤ 0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
⑥ 0.98 in. (25 mm) in length

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ IIE4RV057

Regulations on the use of tire chains

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the rear tires.
● Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 — 1/2 mile (0.5 — 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

CAUTION

■Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

• Use tires of the specified size.
  ●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
• Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.
  ● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

■Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

• Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
  ● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
  ● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
  ● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
• Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system.

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

Utility vehicle precautions

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Utility vehicle feature

● Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
●An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems.
- It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may cause the vehicle to rollover.

CAUTION

■ Utility vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:

• In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
  ●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.
  Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.
• Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier (if equipped) will make the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.
  ●Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.
• Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

Off-road driving

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-road vehicles.

●Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to travel.
- Respect private property. Get owner's permission before entering private property.
- Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
- Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

■Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the following organizations.

●State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
●State Motor Vehicle Bureau
●Recreational Vehicle Clubs
●U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

CAUTION

■Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury or damage to your vehicle:

●Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.
- Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.
●Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or snow.
● After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.
- When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle's suspension and chassis.

NOTICE

■To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other components does not occur.

● Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.
● Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the gear oil's lubricating qualities.

■When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep water.

■Inspection after off-road driving

●Sand and mud that has accumulated around brake drums and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.
● Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Interior features

5

5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Manual air conditioning system 288

Automatic air conditioning system ... 295

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers.... 305

Windshield wiper de-icer... 307

Interior features

5

5-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types...... 308

Using the radio.... 312

Using the CD player...... 315

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs.... 320

Operating an iPod...... 327

Operating a USB memory.... 335

Optimal use of the audio system.... 343

Using the AUX port ..... 345

Using the steering wheel audio switches .... 346

Bluetooth® audio/phone.... 349

Using the Bluetooth ^® audio/phone 354

Operating a Bluetooth ^® enabled portable player 359

Making a phone call...... 362

Using the "SETUP" menu ("Bluetooth*" menu).... 367

Using the "SETUP" menu ("PHONE" menu) ...... 372

5-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list...... 377

- Interior lights...... 378

• Personal lights...... 378

5-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features ..... 380

- Glove box.... 381

- Console box.... 382

• Cup holders ..... 383

- Bottle holders...... 384

Luggage compartment features...... 385

5-5. Other interior features

Sun visors and vanity mirrors.... 395

Clock.... 396

Power outlets 397

Seat heaters.... 398

Armrest 400

Coat hooks...... 401

Assist grips.... 402

Manual air conditioning system\*

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ A/C IIN5RV036

① Air outlet selector dial
② Fan speed control dial
③ Temperature control dial

④ Cooling and dehumidification function on/off button
⑤ Outside/recirculated air mode button

*: If equipped

Adjusting the settings

1 To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).

Turning the dial to "0" turns off the fan.

2 To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

If ☐ not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or heated air.

3 To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selector dial to the desired position.

The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be selected for more delicate adjustment.

Defogging the windshield

1 Set the air outlet selector dial to

position.

If the recirculated air mode is used, it will automatically switch to the outside air mode.

Line drawing of a car interior with steering wheel, dashboard, and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

2 Perform the following operations accordingly:

● To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.
● To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial.
- If the dehumidification function is not operating, press (A/C) to operate the dehumidification function.

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

Air outlets and air flow

Upper body

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, seats, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Upper body and feet

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and airway (no text or symbols)

Feet

IINSRV034

Feet and windshield

IIN5RV035

5

Interior features

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press

The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-

lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

■Front center outlets

① Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
② Turn the knob to open or close the vent for rear seat occupants.

② ① ① IIN5RV044

■Front side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Diagram of a mechanical component with two curved arrows indicating rotational motion, no text or symbols present.

① Open the vent.
② Close the vent.

① ② IIN5RV046

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled to prioritize fuel efficiency by regulating the engine speed and compressor operation to restrict the heating/cooling capacity.

To improve air conditioning performance, turn off Eco drive mode. (→P. 209)

■Fogging up of the windows

●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning 📞 will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the wind-shield effectively.

• If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
  ●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

■ When outside air temperature approaches 32 °F (0 °C)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when is/pressed.

Air conditioning odors

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring: It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

Air conditioning filter

→P. 460

CAUTION

■To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not set the air outlet selection dial to

during cool air operation in

extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

Automatic air conditioning system\*

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 68 68 AUTO OFF RONT SYNC A/C 15 14 13 12 11

IIN5RV030a

① Driver's side temperature control dial
② Automatic mode button
③ Micro dust and pollen filter mode button
④ Driver's side temperature setting display
⑤ Fan speed display
⑥ Air outlet display
⑦ Passenger's side temperature setting display
⑧ Windshield defogger button

⑨ Simultaneous mode button
⑩ Passenger's side temperature control dial
⑪ Cooling and dehumidification function on/off button
⑫ Air outlet selector button
⑬ Fan speed control button
⑭ Outside air or recirculated air mode button
⑮ Off button

Using the automatic air conditioning system

1 Press AUTO

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting and humidity.

2 Turn (clockwise to increases the temperature and turn

counterclockwise to decreases the temperature.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.

Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is-on):

The driver's side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for the driver's and passenger's side. At this time, operate the passenger's side temperature control dial to enter individual mode.

Individual mode (the indicator on is off):

The temperature for the driver's and passenger's side can be adjusted separately.

Adjusting the settings manually

1 To adjust the fan speed, press “^” on to increase the fan speed and “√” to decrease the fan speed. Press to turn the fan off.

2 To adjust the temperature setting, turn clockwise to

increases the temperature and turn — counterclockwise to

decreases the temperature.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous modes each time is pressed.

Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is on):

The driver's side temperature control dial can be used to adjust the temperature for the driver's and passenger's side. At this time, operate the passenger's side temperature control dial to enter individual mode.

Individual mode (the indicator on is off):

The temperature for the driver's and passenger's side can be adjusted separately.

3 To change the air outlets, press “^” or “√” on

The air outlets used are switched each time either side the button is pressed.

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases. Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

To return to the previous mode, press □ again when the wind-shield is defogged.

IINSRV031

Air outlets and air flow

Upper body

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, seats, and passenger seat (no text or symbols)

Upper body and feet

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel, dashboard, and airway (no text or symbols)

Feet

IINSRV034

Feet and windshield

If the recirculated air mode is used, it will automatically switch to the outside air mode.

IIN5RV035

5

Interior features

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press

The mode switches between outside air mode (the indicator is off) and recirculated air mode (the indicator is on) each time is pressed.

Micro dust and pollen filter mode button

Operates micro dust and pollen filter mode on/off.

Outside air mode switches to recirculated air mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body. Usually the system will turn off automatically after approximately 3 minutes.

AUTO OFF IINSRV047

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

■Front center outlets

① Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.
② Turn the knobs to open or close the vents.
③ Turn the knob to open or close the vent for rear seat occupants.

③ ① ① ② ② IIN5RV089

■Front side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Diagram of a mechanical component with two curved arrows indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols)

① Open the vent.
② Close the vent.

① ② IIN5RV046

Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:

●Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity
●Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:

• Adjust the fan speed
  ● Turn off Eco drive mode ( P. 209)

■ Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after is pressed.

■Fogging up of the windows

●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the wind-shield effectively.
- If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

• When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
  ● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

When the outside temperature exceeds 75^ F ( 24^ C) and the air conditioning system is on

• In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.
• Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is in the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system)
• It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing

■Micro dust and pollen filter

- In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the following may occur:

• Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.
  • The dehumidification function operates.
• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.

●In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press
●In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up.
●The pollens are filtered out even if the pollen removal mode is turned off.

■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.

Air conditioning odors

● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

Air conditioning filter

→P. 460

Customization

Settings (e.g. outside/recirculated air mode) can be changed. (Customizable features → P. 583)

CAUTION

■To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors (if equipped).

▶ Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system

On/off

The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

IIN5RV050

▶ Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system

On/off

The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

IIN5RV051

Operating conditions

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The engine switch is in the "ON" position.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

The outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

CAUTION

■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Turn the defoggers off when the engine is off.

Windshield wiper de-icer\*

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the wind-shield and wiper blades.

On/off

The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. Pressing the switch again also turns the de-icer off.

IIN5RV048

Operating conditions

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

CAUTION

■When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Do not touch the lower part of the windshield or the side of the front pillars, as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

*: If equipped

Audio system types

▶ Vehicles with a Display Audio system Refer to the "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

PWR VOL TUNE SCROLL AUDIO SEEK TRACK CAR A B IIA5RV057US

Ⓐ Display Audio system
⑧ Premium Display Audio system

▶ Vehicles without a Display Audio system

CD player with AM/FM radio

PWR-VOL TUNE-SCROLL SETUP TEXT SCAN SEEK TRACK MEDIA RADIO

IIM5RV001

Title Page
Using the radio P. 312
Using the CD player P. 315
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 320
Operating an iPod P. 327
Operating a USB memory P. 335
Optimal use of the audio system P. 343
Using the AUX port P. 345
Using the steering switches P. 346

Changing language setting

1 Press the "SETUP" button.
2 Turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob to select "Language".
3 Press the knob.
4 Turn the knob as corresponds to the desired language.
"English", "Español", or "Français" can be selected.
Press the knob or (SAVE) to return to the setup menu.

■ Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

CAUTION

■Certification for the disc player

●Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

● Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
  This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
  • This product utilizes a laser.
  Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

■Certification for the Display Audio system

FCC ID: BABFT0017A

FCC ID: BABFT0032A

IC: 2024B-FT0017A

IC: 2024B-FT0032A

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Puerto Rico

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20 cm and more between the radiator and person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Co-location:

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

▶ For vehicles sold in Canada

In English

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

In French

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine is stopped.

■To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

Using the radio\*

PWR VC PWR VD ① ② PWR VD TUE-ROLL ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ TEXT FM1 98.1MHz PSERVICE 5000 Radio text 1-16 1400 Radio text 17-32+ 87.5 98.1 98.1 105.1 | 107.5 | 108.0 TRACK MEDIA RADIO SCAN IIM5RV037

① Power
② Volume
③ Adjusting the frequency
④ Scanning for receivable stations

⑤ AM/FM mode button
⑥ Station selectors
⑦ Seeking the frequency
⑧ Displaying text message

Setting station presets

1 Search for the desired stations by turning the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob or pressing "^" or "∨" on the "SEEK/TRACK" button.
2 Press and hold one of the station is to be set to until you hear a beep.

*: If equipped

Scanning radio stations

■Scanning the preset radio stations

1 Press and hold the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
To cancel, press the button again.
2 When the desired station is reached, press the button again.

■Scanning all the radio stations within range

1 Press the "SCAN" button.
All the stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
To cancel, press the button again.
2 When the desired station is reached, press the button again.

Switching the display

Press the "TEXT" button to display or hide the radio texts.

If there are following texts, is displayed.

Press the button to display the remaining texts.

■When the battery is disconnected

Stations presets are erased.

■Reception sensitivity

●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted on the roof. The antenna can be removed from the base by turning it. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted on the roof.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases

●The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.
● A cover will be put on the roof.

Using the CD player\*

PAR-VC PAR-VC ① ② ③ ④ PAR VOL TARE SCROLL MENU TEXT CD ➕ TRACK TITLE ➕ 5000 ▲ ARTIST NAME ➕ T400 ● DISC TITLE ➕ SD-83 ▶ RPT ROOM TRAN TAG TRACK MEDIA RADIO ⑤ ⑪ ⑪ ⑩ ⑨ ⑧ ⑦ ⑥

① Power
② Volume
③ CD eject
④ Selecting a track or displaying track list
⑤ Searching playback
⑥ Random play or back button

⑦ Repeat play
⑧ Fast forwarding or rewinding
⑨ Changing the audio source/ playback
⑩ Playback/pause
⑪ Selecting a track
⑫ Displaying text message

Loading CDs

Insert a CD.

Ejecting CDs

Press and remove the CD.

Selecting a track

Turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob or press "^" to move up or "∨" to move down using the "SEEK/TRACK" button until the desired track number is displayed.

*: If equipped

Selecting a track from a track list

1 Press the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob.
The track list will be displayed.
2 Turn and press the knob to select a track.
To return to the previous display, press ☐(BACK).

Scanning tracks

1 Press the "SCAN" button.
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press the button again.
2 Press the button again when the desired track is reached.

Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks

Press □ ◀◀◀ ) □ or ▶ ( ).

Random play

Press (RDM).

To cancel, press ☐(RDM) again.

Repeat play

Press (RPT).

To cancel, press ☐(RPT) again.

Playing and pausing tracks

Press □▶(II).

Switching the display

Press the "TEXT" button to display or hide the CD title.

If there are following texts, is displayed.

Press and hold the button to display the remaining texts.

■Display

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed properly or may not be displayed at all.

Error messages

"ERROR":

This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.

"CD CHECK":

The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

"WAIT":

Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a while and then press the "MEDIA" button. If the CD still cannot be played back, contact your Toyota dealer.

■Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protect features may not play correctly.

■CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.

If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.

Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs or 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc. Doing so may damage the player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

- CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in. (12 cm)

Illustration of three metallic discs with a prohibition symbol (no text or labels)

● Low-quality and deformed CDs

ITN32A003

NOTICE

- CDs with a transparent or translucent recording area

Three circular discs and a CD with a pink prohibition symbol (no text or labels on discs)

- CDs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have had the label peeled off

ITN32A005

■ CD Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or the player itself.

• Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
• Do not apply oil to the CD player.
  ● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
  ●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs\*

PWR-VC ① PWR-VC ② TUBE SCROLL ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲ ⑳ ⑴ ⑵ ⑶ ⑷ ⑸ ⑨ ⑩ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲ ⑳ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲ ⑳ ⑪ ⑫ ⑬ ⑭ ⑮ ⑯ ⑰ ⑱ ⑲ ⑳ ㉑ ㉒ ㉓ ㉔ ㉕ ㉖ ㉗ ㉘ ㉙ ㉚ ㉛ ㉜ ㉝ ㉞ ㉟ ㉟A ㉟B ㉟C ㉟D ㉟E ㉟F ㉟G ㉟H ㉟I ㉟J ㉟K ㉟L ㉟M ㉟N ㉟O ㉟P ㉟Q ㉟R ㉟S ㉟T ㉟U ㉟V ㉟W ㉟X ㉟Y ㉟Z ㉟A ㉟B ㉟C ㉟D ㉟E ㉟F ㉟G ㉟H ㉟I ㉟J ㉟K ㉟L ㉟M ㉟N ㉟O ㉟P ㉟Q ㉟R ㉟S ㉟T ㉟U ㉟V ㉟W ㉟X

① Power
② Volume
③ CD eject
④ Selecting a file or displaying folder list
⑤ Searching playback
⑥ Next commands, random play or back button

⑦ Repeat play
⑧ Fast forwarding, rewinding or selecting a folder
⑨ Changing the audio source/ playback
⑩ Playback/pause
⑪ Previous commands
⑫ Selecting a file
⑬ Displaying text message

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

→P.315

*: If equipped

Selecting a folder

■Selecting folders one at a time

Press ☐() to select the desired folder.

Press □(MORE>) to display the commands.

- Selecting a folder and file from folder list

1 Press the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
The folder list will be displayed.
2 Turn and press the knob to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press □(BACK).

■ Returning to the first folder

Press and hold (FOLDER) until you hear a beep.

Scanning a folder

1 Press and hold the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played. To cancel, press the button again.
2 When the desired folder is reached, press the button again.

Selecting a file

Turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob or press “^” or “∨” on the "SEEK/TRACK" button to select the desired file.

Scanning the files in a folder

1 Press the "SCAN" button.
The first 10 seconds of each file will be played. To cancel, press the button again.
2 When the desired file is reached, press the button again.

Fast forwarding and rewinding files

Press □◀◀（）□or▶（）.

Press ☐(BACK) to display the commands.

Random play

Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:

Folder random→Disc random→Off

Press (MORE>) to display the command.

Repeat play

Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:

File repeat→Folder repeat*→Off

*: Available except when RDM (random play) is selected

Press ☐ (MOR) to display the command.

Playing and pausing tracks

Press □▶(II).

Press ←BACK) to display the command.

Switching the display

Press the "TEXT" button to display or hide the album title.

If there are following texts, is displayed.

Press and hold the button to display the remaining texts.

■Display

→P. 317

Error messages

"ERROR":

This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player.

"CD CHECK":

The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

"NO SUPPORT":

This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.

■Discs that can be used

→P. 317

■CD player protection feature

→P. 317

If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

→P. 317

Lens cleaners

→P. 317

■MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.

●MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

- Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32 — 320 (kbps)

• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8 — 160 (kbps)

- Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

●WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
- Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

- Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48 — 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48 — 320 (kbps)

- Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

●Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats:
  CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
  CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

- File formats:

ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

- File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

●Multi-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

●MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data, only music data can be played.

• Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

●Playback

• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz .
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

NOTICE

■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used

→P. 318

■CD Player precautions

→P. 319

Operating an iPod\*

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

■ Connecting an iPod

1 Open the cover and connect an iPod using an iPod cable. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.

IIA5RV062a

2 Press the "MEDIA" button repeatedly until "iPod" is displayed.

*: If equipped

Control panel

IIM5RV040 ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ ⑩ TITLE TUBE SCROLL PWR-VOL OUTPUT iPod SONG ARTIST ALBUM TRANSMI RPT RASM TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSMI TRANSM1 TRANSM2 TRANSM3 TRANSM4 TRANSM5 TRANSM6 TRANSM7 TRANSM8 TRANSM9 TRANSM10 TRANSM11 TRANSM12 TRANSM13 TRANSM14 TRANSM15 TRANSM16 TRANSM17 TRANSM18 TRANSM19 TRANSM20 TRANSM21 TRANSM22 TRANSM23 TRANSM24 TRANSM25 TRANSM26 TRANSM27 TRANSM28 TRANSM29 TRANSM30 TRANSM31 TRANSM32 TRANSM33 TRANSM34 TRANSM35 TRANSM36 TRANSM37 TRANSM38 TRANSM39 TRANSM40

① Power
② Volume
③ Selecting an iPod menu/song or displaying song list
④ Random play or back button
⑤ Repeat play

⑥ Fast-forwarding or rewinding
⑦ Changing the audio source/ playback
⑧ Playback/pause
⑨ iPod menu mode, playback
⑩ Selecting a song
⑪ Displaying text message

Selecting a play mode

1 Press (BROWSE) to select iPod menu mode.
2 Turning the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob clockwise changes the play mode in the following order:

"Playlists" → "Artists" → "Albums" → "Songs" → "Podcasts" →

"Genres" → "Composers" → "Audiobooks"

3 Press the knob to select the desired play mode.

■Play mode list

Play mode	First selection	Second selection	Third selection	Fourth selection
“Playlists”	Playlists select	Songs select -	-
“Artists” Artists	select	Albums select	Songs select -
“Albums”	Albums select	Songs select -	-
“Songs” Songs	select - - -
“Podcasts”	Podcasts select	Episodes select	-	-
“Genres” Genre	select Artists	select	Albums select	Songs select
“Composers”	Composers select	Albums select	Songs select -
“Audiobooks”	Audiobooks select	Chapter select	-	-

■Selecting a list

1 Turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob to display the first selection list.
2 Press the knob to select the desired item and display the second selection list.
3 Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.

To return to the previous selection list, press BACK.

4 Press (PLAY) to play the desired selection.

Selecting songs

Turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob or "^" or "∨" on the "SEEK/TRACK" button to select the desired song.

Selecting a song from the song list

1 Press the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob.
The song list will be displayed.
2 Turn the knob to select a song.
3 Press the knob to play the song.
To return to the previous display, press ☐(BACK).

Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs

Press □ ◀◀◀ ) □ o▶▶ ( ).

Repeat play

Press (RPT).

To cancel, press = (RPT) again.

Random play

Pressing □(RDM) changes modes in the following order: Track random→Album random→Off.

Playing and pausing tracks

Press □▶( ) .

Switching the display

Press the "TEXT" button to display or hide the album title.

If there are following texts, ▶s displayed.

Press and hold the button to display the remaining texts.

About iPod

Made for

iPod

iPhone

• “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
  ●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
• iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

■iPod functions

• When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
  ● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve some malfunctions.
• While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle's audio system instead.

■iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.

For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner's Manual.

■Display

→P. 317

Error messages

"ERROR":

This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

"NO SONGS":

This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

"NO PLAYLIST":

This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.

"UPDATE YOUR iPod":

This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.

■ Compatible models

The following iPod ^® , iPod nano ^® , iPod classic ^® , iPod touch ^® and iPhone ^® devices can be used with this system.

●Made for

• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone

Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this system.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

●Maximum number of lists in device: 9999

●Maximum number of songs in device: 65535

●Maximum number of songs per list: 65535

CAUTION

■While driving

Do not connect iPod or operate the controls. Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to iPod

• Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
• Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
• Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

Operating a USB memory\*

Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speakers.

■Connecting a USB memory

1 Open the cover and connect a USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if it is not turned on.

IIA5RV062a

2 Press the "MEDIA" button repeatedly until "USB" is displayed.

*: If equipped

Control panel

PRE V2 PRE V2 ① ② PRE VOL TUNE SCROLL OUTPUT ③ ④ ⑫ TEXT SELECT TRACK USB > TRACK TITLE ● ARTIST NAME ● DISC TITLE SCAN TITLE MRI: 33 HOME > IIM5RV041

① Power
② Volume
③ Selecting a file or displaying folder list
④ Searching playback
⑤ Next commands, random play or back button
⑥ Repeat play

⑦ Fast forwarding, rewinding or selecting a folder
⑧ Changing the audio source/ playback
⑨ Playback/pause
⑩ Previous commands
⑪ Selecting a file
⑫ Displaying text message

Selecting a folder

■Selecting folders one at a time

Press ☐() to select the desired folder.

Press (MORE>) to display the commands.

- Selecting a folder and file from folder list

1 Press the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
The folder list will be displayed.
2 Turn and press the knob to select a folder and file.
To return to the previous display, press ☐(BACK).

■ Returning to the first folder

Press and hold (FOLDER) until you hear a beep.

Scanning a folder

1 Press and hold the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in each folder will be played. To cancel, press the button again.
2 When the desired folder is reached, press the button again.

Selecting a file

Turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob or press “^” or “∨” on the "SEEK/TRACK" button to select the desired file.

Scanning the files in a folder

1 Press the "SCAN" button.
The first 10 seconds of each file will be played. To cancel, press the button again.
2 When the desired file is reached, press the button again.

Fast-forwarding and rewinding files

Press □◀◀（）□or▶（）.

Press ☐(BACK) to display the commands.

Random play

Pressing □(RDM) changes modes in the following order: Folder random→All folder random→Off Press □(MORE>) to display the command.

Repeat play

Pressing □(RPT) changes modes in the following order: File repeat→Folder repeat*→Off *: Available except when RDM (random play) is selected Press □(MORE>) to display the command.

Playing and pausing tracks

Press ▶▶(II).

Press ←BACK) to display the command.

Switching the display

Press the "TEXT" button to display or hide the album title. If there are following texts, ▶ is displayed. Press and hold the button to display the remaining texts.

USB memory functions

● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
- If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected and reconnected, format the memory.

■Display

→P. 317

Error messages

"ERROR":

This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.

"NO MUSIC":

This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory.

USB memory

● Compatible devices

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback

●Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12mbps)
• File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows)
  • Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

●MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.

●MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz) MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

- Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32 — 320 (kbps)

• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8 — 160 (kbps)

- Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

●WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
  • Compatible sampling frequencies 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

- Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback) Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48 — 192 (kbps) Ver. 9: CBR 48 — 320 (kbps)

- File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

●MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.

• Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).

●Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz .
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION

■While driving

Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls. Doing so may cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to USB memory

• Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory.
• Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
• Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

Optimal use of the audio system\*

① Displays the current mode
② Changes the following settings

- Sound quality and volume balance →P.344

The sound quality and balance setting can be changed to produce the best sound.

• Automatic sound levelizer →P.344

• Language →P.309

③ Selecting the mode

① INE-SCROLL SETUP ② CRO SETUP ③ TUP SCAN FOLDER IIM5RV020

*: If equipped

Using the audio control function

■Changing sound quality modes

1 Press the "SETUP" button.
2 Turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob to select "Sound Setting".
3 Press the knob.
4 Turn the knob as corresponds to the desired mode.
"BASS", "TREBLE", "FADER", "BALANCE", or "ASL" can be selected.
5 Press the knob.

■Adjusting sound quality

Turning the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob adjusts the level.

Sound quality mode	Mode displayed	Level	Turn to the left	Turn to the right
Bass* “BASS” -5 to 5			Low High
Treble* “TREBLE” -5 to 5
Front/rear volume balance	“FADER”	F7 to R7	Shifts to rear	Shifts to front
Left/right volume balance	“BALANCE”	L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right

Press the knob or (SAVE) to return to the sound setting menu.

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.

■Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)

When ASL is selected, turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob to change the amount of ASL.

"LOW", "MID", "HIGH", or "OFF" can be selected.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehicle speed.

Press the knob or (SAVE) to return to the sound setting menu.

Using the AUX port\*

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it using the vehicle's speakers.

1 Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.

IIA5RV062a

2 Press the "MEDIA" button repeatedly until "AUX" is displayed.

Silencing a sound

Press ☐ (MUTE).

To cancel, press ☑(UNMUTE).

■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet

Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio device.

Using the steering wheel audio switches\*

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or navigation system.

① Volume
② Radio mode:

Selects a radio station

CD mode:

Selects a track and file (MP3 and WMA)

Bluetooth® audio mode:

Selects a track and album

iPod mode:

Selects a song

USB memory mode:

Selects a file and folder

③ Power on, select audio source

① ② ② ① ③ MODE #HGLD IIM5RV022

*: If equipped

Turning on the power

Press the "MODE" switch when the audio system is turned off.

Changing the audio source

Press the "MODE" switch when the audio system is turned on. The audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If a mode cannot be used, it will be skipped.

AM→FM1→FM2→CD mode→iPod or USB memory→Bluetooth® audio→AUX

Adjusting the volume

Press the “+” switch to increase the volume and the “-” switch to decrease the volume.

Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Silencing a sound

Press and hold the "MODE" switch.

To cancel, press and hold the switch again.

Selecting a radio station

1 Press the "MODE" switch to select the radio mode.
2 Press the “^” or “∨” switch to select a preset station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file or song

1 Press the "MODE" switch to select the CD, Bluetooth® audio, iPod or USB memory mode.
2 Press the “^” or “∨” switch to select the desired track/file or song.

Selecting an album

1 Press the "MODE" switch to select Bluetooth® audio mode.
2 Press and hold the “^” or “∨” switch until you hear a beep.

Selecting a folder (MP3 and WMA or USB memory)

1 Press the "MODE" switch to select CD or USB memory mode.
2 Press and hold the “^” or “∨” switch until you hear a beep.

CAUTION

■To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

Bluetooth® audio/phone\*

Bluetooth® audio

The Bluetooth ^® audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth ^® , a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player does not support Bluetooth ^® , the Bluetooth ^® audio system will not function.

Bluetooth ^® phone (hands-free phone system)

This system supports Bluetooth ^® , which allows you to make or receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and the system, and without operating the cellular phone.

■Conditions affecting operation

The Bluetooth ^® audio/phone may not operate normally in the following situations:

●The portable player does not support Bluetooth®
●The cellular phone is located outside the service area
●The Bluetooth® device is switched off
●The Bluetooth ^® device has a low battery
●The Bluetooth ^® device is not connected to the system
- The Bluetooth ^ device is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box, or metal material covers or touches the device

*: If equipped

■When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improperly accessed. ( P. 371)

About Bluetooth®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth® ITN33A005

■Compatible models

- Bluetooth® specifications:

Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)

●Following Profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)

Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be connected to the Bluetooth ^® audio/phone. However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.

Cellular phone

• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5)
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0

Certification

FCC ID: BABFT0023A

IC: 2024B-FT0023A

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Puerto Rico

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

For vehicles sold in Canada

In English

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

In French

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20 cm and more between the radiator and person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Co-location:

This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

CAUTION

■While driving

Do not use the portable audio player or connect the Bluetooth ^® system.

■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

• Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
  Before using Bluetooth ^® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to portable players

Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone\*

Audio unit

① Bluetooth ^® connection condition

If "BT" is not displayed, the Bluetooth® audio/phone cannot be used.

② Displays set up menu

③ Selects items such as menu and number

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected item

① TIL BT ② ③ ⑦ TEXT 8 TRANSMI NAME 30000000000000 SCAN 4 TRACK 5 6 IIM5RV023

④ Off-hook switch

Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call

⑤ On-hook switch

Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call

⑥ Selects speed dials

⑦ Displays information that is too long to be displayed at one time on the display (press and hold)

⑧ Display

A message, name, number, etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters and special characters cannot be displayed.

*: If equipped

■Steering wheel switches (Bluetooth ^® audio)

→P.346

■Steering wheel switches (Bluetooth ^® phone)

① Volume The voice guidance volume cannot be adjusted using this button.
② Off-hook switch Turns the hands-free system on/start a call
③ On-hook switch Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuse a call

① ② ③ MODE WRLD DISP IIM5RV025

■Microphone

IIASRV065

5

Interior features

Using the Bluetooth® audio/phone for the first time

Before using the Bluetooth ^® audio/phone, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth ^® device in the system. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a device:

1 Press the "SETUP" button and select "Bluetooth*" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Press the knob and select "BT pairing" using the knob. A passkey will be displayed.

3 SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) incompatible Bluetooth ^® devices: Input the passkey into the device.

SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth ^® devices: Select “Yes” to register the device. Depending on the type of device, it may register automatically.

If a Bluetooth ^® device has both music player and cellular phone functions, both functions will be registered at the same time. When deleting the device, both functions will be deleted at the same time.

If the on-hook switch is pressed and the "PHONE" mode is entered when no phones have been registered, the registration screen will be automatically displayed.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Menu list of the Bluetooth® audio/phone

First menu S	Second menu Third	menu Operation details
“Bluetooth*”	“BT pairing” -		Registering a Bluetooth® device
	“List phone” -		Listing the registered cellular phones
	“List audio” -		Listing the registered portable players
	“Passkey” -		Changing the pass-key
	“BT power” -		Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
	“Bluetooth* info”	“Device name” “Device address”	Displaying the device status
	“Display setting” -		Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off
	“Initialize” -		Initializing the settings

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

First menu S	Second menu Third	menu Operation details
“PHONE”	“Phonebook”	“Add contacts”	Adding a new number
		“Add SD”	Registering a speed dial
		“Delete call history”	Deleting a number stored in the call history
		“Delete contacts”	Deleting a number stored in the phone-book
		“Delete other PB”	Deleting a phone-book's data
	“Auto transfer” -		Setting automatic transferring of the phonebook on or off
	“HF sound setting”	“Call volume” Setting	Setting call volume
		“Ringtone volume”	Setting ring tone volume
		“Ringtone” Setting	the ring tone
	“Transfer histories”	-	Transferring the call histories

Bluetooth® audio/phone system functions

Depending on the Bluetooth ^® device, certain functions may not be available.

Operating a Bluetooth® enabled portable player\*

PMR V2 PMR V3 ① ② PMR VOL TUNE SROLL ③ ⑪ TEXT SEEK TRACK ⑨ SONG ARTIST ALEUM TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN IIM5RV042

① Power
② Volume
③ Search playback
④ Next commands, random play or back button
⑤ Repeat play
⑥ Fast forwarding, rewinding or selecting an album

⑦ Changing the audio source/ playback
⑧ Playback/pause
⑨ Previous commands
⑩ Selecting a track
⑪ Displaying text message

Selecting an album

Press (FOLDER) or (FOLDER>) to select desired album.

Press □(MORE>) to display the commands.

Scanning an album

1 Press and hold the "SCAN" button until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first track in each album will be played.
To cancel, press the button again.
2 When the desired album is reached, press the button again.

Selecting a track

Press “^” or “∨” on the “SEEK/TRACK” button to select the desired track.

Scanning the tracks in an album

1 Press the "SCAN" button.
The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.
To cancel, press the button again.
2 When the desired track is reached, press the button again.

Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks

Press □◀◀（）□or▶（）.

Press ←(BACK) to display the commands.

Repeat play

Pressing ☐(RPT) changes modes in the following order:

Track repeat→Album repeat→Off.

Press (MORE>) to display the command.

Random play

Pressing □(RDM) changes modes in the following order:

Album random→All track random→Off.

Press □(MORE>) to display the command.

Playing and pausing tracks

Press □▶( ) .

Press ☐(BACK) to display the command.

Switching the display

Press the "TEXT" button to display or hide the album title.

If there are following texts, is displayed.

Press and hold the button to display the remaining texts.

Bluetooth® audio system functions

Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.

■Display

→P. 317

Making a phone call\*

To enter the "PHONE" mode, press the off-hook switch.

■Making a phone call

●Dialing by inputting a name
●Speed dialing
●Dialing by entering the number
●Dialing from call histories

■Receiving a phone call

●Answering the phone
●Refusing the call

■Operations during a call

●Transferring a call
●Muting your voice
●Inputting digits
- Setting call volume

■Adjusting the ring tone volume when receiving a call

*: If equipped

Dialing by selecting a name

1 Select "Phonebook" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select the desired name using the knob and press the off-hook switch.
By pressing □(Add S. Dial) and one of the speed dial buttons (from
[1] to [5]) while the desired name is selected, it can be registered as a speed dial.
Press □(A-Z) to display the registered names in alphabetical order of the initial.

Speed dialing

1 Select "Speed dials" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Press the desired preset button (from 1) to [5] and press the off-hook switch.

To delete a registered speed dial, after selecting the desired preset button (from [1] to [5]) press (DELETE) and then press (YES).

To overwrite a speed dial, after selecting the desired preset button (from [1] to [5]) press (YES).

Dialing by entering the number

1 Select "Dial by number" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Enter the phone number and press the off-hook switch.

Dialing from call histories

1 Select "All calls", "Missed calls", "Incoming calls" or "Outgoing calls" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.

2 Select a desired number using the knob and press the off-hook switch.

The following operations can be performed:

●Registering a number as a speed dial

Press □(Add S. Dial) and then press the desired preset button (from □ [1] to [5]).

●Deleting the selected number

Press ☐ (DELETE) and press (YES).

When receiving a phone call

■Answering the phone

Press the off-hook switch.

■Refusing the call

Press the on-hook switch.

■Receiving a call when on another call

Press the off-hook switch.

Pressing the off-hook switch again returns you to the previous call.

Operations during a call

●Transferring a call

A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following methods:

a. Operate the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation of the phone.

b. Press the (HNDSET).*

*: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the cellular phone to the system during a call.

●Muting your voice

Press ☐ (MUTE).

●Inputting digits

Press ☐(0-9) and use the “TUNE•SCROLL” knob to input the desired digits.

• To send the input digits press (SEND).
• When finished, press (EXIT) to return to the previous screen.

- Setting call volume

To decrease the volume: Turn the "PWR•VOL" knob counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn the "PWR•VOL" knob clockwise.

Adjusting the ring tone volume when receiving a call

To decrease the volume: Turn the "PWR•VOL" knob counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn the "PWR•VOL" knob clockwise.

■When talking on the phone

• Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
• Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will increase.

■Automatic volume adjustment

When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.

■Phone call system functions

Depending on the cellular phone, certain functions may not be available.

■ Situations where the system may not recognize your voice

●When driving on a rough road
●When driving at high speeds
- When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
- When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise

Using the "SETUP" menu ("Bluetooth\*" menu)\*

Registering a Bluetooth ^® device in the system allows the system to function. The following functions can be used for registered devices:

■Functions and operation procedures

1 Press the "SETUP" button and select "Bluetooth*" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Press the knob and select one of the following functions using the knob.

• Registering a Bluetooth ^ device "BT pairing"
  ●Listing the registered cellular phones "List phone"
  ●Listing the registered portable players "List audio"
  ●Changing the passkey "Passkey"
• Setting automatic connection of the device on or off "BT power"
  ●Displaying the device status "Bluetooth* info"
• Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off "Display setting"
  ●Initialization "Initialize"
  *: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Registering a Bluetooth ^® device

Select "BT pairing" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob and press ☐ (Add New).

• If a Bluetooth ^ device is not connected currently Perform the procedure for registering a Bluetooth ^ device from step 3. (→P. 356)
• If other Bluetooth ^ device is connected currently The Bluetooth ^ device needs to be disconnected. After disconnecting, perform the procedure for registering a Bluetooth ^ device from step 2(→P. 356)
• If device list is full Select the Bluetooth® device to be deleted using the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob and press (YES).

Listing the registered cellular phones

Select "List phone" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob. The list of registered cellular phones will be displayed.

●Connecting the registered cellular phone to the audio system
1 Select the name of the cellular phone to be connected using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "Select" using the knob.

●Deleting a registered cellular phone
1 Select the name of the cellular phone to be deleted using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "Delete" using the knob.
3 Press (YES).

●Disconnecting the registered cellular phone from the audio system

1 Select the name of the cellular phone to be disconnected using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "Disconnect" using the knob.
3 Press (YES).

Listing the registered portable players

Select "List audio" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob. The list of registered portable players will be displayed.

- Connecting the registered portable player to the audio system

1 Select the name of the portable player to be connected using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "Select" using the knob.

●Deleting the registered portable player

1 Select the name of the portable player to be deleted using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "Delete" using the knob.
3 Press (YES).

●Disconnecting the registered portable player from the audio system

1 Select the name of the portable player to be disconnected using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "Disconnect" using the knob.
3 Press (YES).

- Selecting the connection method

1 Select the name of the desired portable player using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "Connection Method" using the knob.
3 Select "From vehicle" or "From audio" using the knob.

Changing the passkey

1 Select "Passkey" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select a 4 to 8-digit passkey using the knob.
Input the number 1 digit at a time.
3 When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been input, press □(ENTER).
If the passkey to be registered has 8 digits, pressing ☐(ENTER) is not necessary.

Setting automatic connection of the device on or off

If “BT power” is set to on, the registered device will be connected automatically when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or ACCESSORY mode (vehicles with a smart key system).

1 Select "BT Power" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "ON" or "OFF" using the knob.

Displaying the device status

Select "Bluetooth* info" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.

●Displaying the device name
Select "Device name" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
●Displaying the device address
Select "Device address" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off

If the "Display setting" is set to on, the portable player connection status will be displayed when the engine switch is turned to the "ACC" or "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).

1 Select "Display setting" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "ON" or "OFF" using the knob.

Initialization

Select "Initialize" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.

●Initializing the sound settings

Select "Sound setting" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob and press ☐ (YES).

For details about sound settings: →P. 372

●Initializing the device information

Select "Car device info" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob and press (YES).

Automatic connection of a portable device, automatic connection confirmation display and the passkey will be initialized.

●Initializing all the settings

Select "All initialize" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob and press ☐ (YES).

■The number of Bluetooth ^® device that can be registered

Up to 5 Bluetooth ^® device can be registered in the system.

Bluetooth ^® audio/phone system functions

Certain functions may not be available during driving.

Using the "SETUP" menu ("PHONE" menu)\*

■Functions and operation procedures

To enter the menu for each function, press the "SETUP" button and follow the steps below using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob:

●Adding a new phone number
1. "PHONE" → 2. "Phonebook" → 3. "Add contacts"

●Setting speed dials

1. "PHONE" → 2. "Phonebook" → 3. "Add SD"

●Deleting call histories

1. "PHONE" → 2. "Phonebook" → 3. "Delete call history"

●Deleting a registered phone number

1. "PHONE" → 2. "Phonebook" → 3. "Delete contacts"

- Deleting another cellular phone's phonebook

1. "PHONE" → 2. "Phonebook" → 3. "Delete other PB"

- Setting call volume

1. "PHONE" → 2. "HF sound setting" → 3. "Call volume"

●Setting ring tone volume

1. "PHONE" → 2. "HF sound setting" → 3. "Ringtone volume"

- Setting ring tone

1. "PHONE" → 2. "HF sound setting" → 3. "Ringtone"

●Transferring call histories

1. "PHONE" → 2. "Transfer histories"

●Setting automatic transferring of the phonebook

1. "PHONE" → 2. "Auto transfer"

*: If equipped

Adding a new phone number

Select "Add contacts" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.

●Transferring all contacts from the cellular phone
Select "Overwrite all" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob and press ☐ (YES).
●Transferring one contact from the cellular phone
Select "Add one contact" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob and press ☐ (YES).

Setting speed dials

1 Select "Add SD" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select the desired data using the knob.
3 Press the desired preset button (from [1] to [5])
For details about setting speed dials from the call history: →P. 364
For details about deleting speed dials: →P. 363

Deleting call histories

Select "Delete call history" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.

●Deleting outgoing call history

1 Select "Outgoing calls" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select the desired phone number using the knob and press ☐ (YES).

To delete all outgoing call history data, press □(ALL) and then press □(YES).

●Deleting incoming call history

1 Select "Incoming calls" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select the desired phone number using the knob and press (YES).

To delete all incoming call history data, press □(ALL) and then press □(YES).

●Deleting missed call history

1 Select "Missed calls" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select the desired phone number using the knob and press ☐ (YES).

To delete all missed call history data, press ☐(ALL) and then press ☐ (YES).

- Deleting a number from all call histories (Outgoing calls, Incoming calls and Missed calls)

1 Select "All calls" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select the desired phone number using the knob and press ☐ (YES).

To delete all of the call histories data, press ☐(ALL) and then press ☐ (YES).

Deleting a registered phone number

1 Select "Delete contacts" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select the desired phone number using the knob and press ☐ (YES).
To delete all the registered phone numbers, press ☐(ALL) and then press ☐(YES).
Press □(A-Z) to display the registered names in alphabetical order of the initial.

Deleting another cellular phone's phonebook

1 Select "Delete other PB" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select the desired phonebook using the knob and press (YES).

Setting automatic transferring of the phonebook on or off

1 Select "Auto transfer" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Select "ON" or "OFF" using the knob.

Setting call volume

1 Select "Call volume" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Change the call volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob clockwise. To set the volume, press ☐(SAVE).

Setting ring tone volume

1 Select "Ringtone volume" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob.
2 Change the ring tone volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob clockwise. To set the volume, press ☐(SAVE).

Setting ring tone

1 Select "Ringtone" using the "TUNE·SCROLL" knob.
2 Using the knob, select a ring tone (1 - 3). To set the selected ring tone, press (SAVE).

Transferring call histories

Select "Transfer histories" using the "TUNE•SCROLL" knob and press ☐ (YES).

Phone number

Up to 1000 names can be stored.

Call history

Up to 10 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing, incoming and missed call history memories.

■Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

Bluetooth® phone system functions

Certain functions may not be available during driving.

Interior lights list

Technical diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification

① Interior lights ( P. 378)
② Interior/personal lights

(→P. 378)

③ Engine switch light (if equipped)
④ Cup holder light (if equipped)

Interior lights

Front

① Off
② Door position
The personal lights and interior light come on when a door is opened. They go off when the doors are closed.
③ On

OFF OFF ① ② ③ OFF OFF IIN5RV004

Rear

① Off
② Door position
The interior lights come on when a door is opened. They go off when the doors are closed.
③ On

Diagram showing a device with three labeled parts and an attached sensor, likely illustrating a mechanical or diagnostic concept.

Personal lights

Turns the light on/off

IIN5RV006

■Illuminated entry system

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.

■To prevent battery discharge

If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the interior light main switch is in the door position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes:

• Interior light
  ●Engine switch light (if equipped)

Customization

Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.

List of storage features

Diagram of a car interior with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference

① Glove box ( P. 381)
② Bottle holders ( P. 384)

③ Console box ( P. 382)
④ Cup holders ( P. 383)
⑤ Storage boxes ( P. 386)

CAUTION

■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

■ When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use

Keep the lids closed.

In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.

Glove box

Pull up the lever to open the glove box.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard with a directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols present)

■Power back door main switch (if equipped)

The power back door main switch is located in the glove box. (→P. 127)

Console box

Lift the lid while pulling up the lever to release the lock.

IINSRV014

■ When using the console box lid as an armrest (vehicles with slide function)

Slide the console box lid forward as needed. Pull the lid forward by holding the front of the lid.

IINSRV072

CAUTION

■ Console box adjustment precaution

• Do not adjust the position of the console box while the vehicle is moving. This may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and may lead to an accident that results in death or serious injury.
• Be careful not to get hands or feet pinched between the front console box and the center panel or rear seats.
• Be careful not to allow the front console box to hit any passengers while adjusting its position.
  ● After adjusting the console box, make sure it is securely locked in position.

Cup holders

Front

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and passenger seat (no text or symbols)

Rear

Pull the armrest down.

Diagram showing car seatbelt mechanism with arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

■ Adjusting the size of the cup holder (front passenger's side)

The adjuster can be removed.

Diagram of a car gear shift mechanism with a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

■Items unsuitable for the cup holders

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

Bottle holders

Front

Interior view of a car dashboard and infotainment system (no text or symbols visible)

Rear

Line drawing of a car interior showing a driver, seatbelt, and dashboard with no visible text or symbols

CAUTION

■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder

Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

NOTICE

■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Luggage compartment features

Cargo hooks

Raise the hooks to use.

The cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

IIN5RV058

CAUTION

■When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.

Grocery bag hooks

Diagram of a car rear view showing structural components and a highlighted inset with a gray object (no text or symbols)

NOTICE

■ Grocery bag hook weight capacity

Do not hang any object heavier than 8.8 lb. (4 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.

Storage boxes

Front

Open the deck board by pulling up the strap.

Diagram showing airflow or fluid flow in a vehicle interior with a labeled component and directional arrow

Rear

▶ Type A

1 Open the deck board by pulling up the strap.

IIN5RV061

2 Fold up the deck board. The lid can be removed.

IIN5RV062

▶ Type B

Open the deck board by pulling up the strap.

IIN5RV063

CAUTION

■Caution while driving

Do not drive with any of the deck boards opened. Items may fall out and cause injury.

Luggage cover (if equipped)

■Installing the luggage cover

1 With the "TOP" marks up, insert the right end of the luggage cover into the recess, then compress the left of the luggage cover and insert it into the recess.
2 Pull out the luggage cover and hook it onto the anchors.

IIN5RV102

IIN5RV106

■Removing the luggage cover

1 Release the cover from the left and right anchors and allow it to retract.
2 Compress the end of the luggage cover and lift the luggage cover up.

IIN5RV113

IIN5RV066

■Stowing the luggage cover

1 Open the rear deck board and remove the deck side covers.

IIN5RV067

2 Insert the right end of the luggage cover into the recess, then compress the left end of the luggage cover and insert it into the recess.

IIN5RV068

CAUTION

■When installing/stowing the luggage cover

Make sure that the luggage cover is securely installed/stowed. Failure to do so may result in serious injury in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

■Caution for the luggage cover

• Do not place anything on the luggage cover to avoid death or serious injury.
• Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover. Climbing on the luggage cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly causing death or serious injury to the child.

NOTICE

■When using the luggage cover

• Do not put heavy items on the luggage cover.
• Install the cover unit in the correct direction so that the "TOP" mark faces upward.

TOP IIN5RV108

Rear cargo net (if equipped)

Position of the rear cargo net can be changed.

▶ Position A (except for full-size spare tire)

Insert the right end of the rear cargo net into the recess, then compress the left end of the rear cargo net and insert it into the recess.

IIN5RV069

▶ Position B

Insert the right end of the rear cargo net into the recess, then compress the left end of the rear cargo net and insert it into the recess.

IIN5RV070

■Stowing the rear cargo net (vehicles with the rear cargo net holders)

1 Open the rear deck board and remove the deck side covers.

IIN5RV067

2 Insert the right end of the rear cargo net into the recess, then compress the left end of the rear cargo net and insert it into the recess.

IIN5RV073

CAUTION

■When installing/stowing the rear cargo net

Make sure that the rear cargo net is securely installed/stowed. Failure to do so may result in serious injury in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

■Caution for the rear cargo net

● To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do not place anything on the net higher than the rear seatbacks. Otherwise, such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.
- Do not allow children to climb on the cargo net. Climbing on the cargo net could result in damage to the cargo net, possibly causing death or serious injury to the child.

NOTICE

■Rear cargo net weight capacity

Do not place anything heavier than 22.1 lb. (10 kg) on the cargo net.

Sun visors and vanity mirrors

Sun visors

① Forward position: Flip down.
② Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.
③ Side extender (if equipped): Place in side position then slide backwards.

① ② ③ IIN5RV076

Vanity mirrors

Slide the cover to open.

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

Diagram of a car interior with a directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.

Clock

The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

① Adjusts the hours.
② Adjusts the minutes.

① H 12:00 ② M IIN5RV078

■The clock is displayed when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The clock data will be reset.

Power outlets

The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10 A.

Open the lid.

IIN5RV080

■The power outlets can be used when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

The engine switch is in the "ACC" or "ON" position.

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the power outlets

Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.

■To prevent the fuse from being blown

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Seat heaters\*

① Turns on the front left seat heater (high)
② Turns on the front left seat heater (low)
③ Turns on the front right seat heater (high)
④ Turns on the front right seat heater (low)

The indicator light comes on.

① HI HI L LO LO ② ③ IIN5RV081

The seat heaters can be used when

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
The engine switch is in the "ON" position.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

When not in use

Turn the seat heater off by returning the switch to its level position. The indicator light turns off.

*: If equipped

CAUTION

Burns

• Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
• Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
  Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.
• Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE

■To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

■To prevent battery discharge

Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.

Armrest

■Front (vehicles with slide function)

Slide the console box lid forward or backward as needed. Pull the lid forward by holding the front of the lid.

Medical illustration showing a hand holding a car seat with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Rear

Fold down the armrest for use.

Diagram of a car seatbelt buckle with a red arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not apply too much load on the armrest.

Coat hooks

The coat hooks are provided with the rear assist grips.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, dashboard, and side panel (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

■Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or serious injury.

Assist grips

An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

Interior view of a car showing driver's seat, dashboard, and rear seats (no text or symbols visible)

CAUTION

■Assist grip

Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.

Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself by falling over.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

Maintenance and care

6

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...... 404

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior...... 408

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements.... 412

General maintenance..... 415

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs.... 419

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions 420

Hood 425

Positioning a floor jack..... 427

Engine compartment...... 429

Tires.... 443

Tire inflation pressure ..... 454

Wheels...... 457

Air conditioning filter...... 460

Wireless remote control/electronic key battery 462

Checking and replacing fuses 465

Light bulbs.... 476

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition:

• Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
  ●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
  ●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
  ●Wipe away any water.
  ● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
  If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■Automatic car washes

●Before washing the vehicle:

• Fold the mirrors
• Remove the antenna
• Turn off the power back door (if equipped)
  Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the antenna and extend the mirrors before driving.

- Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle's paint.

■High pressure car washes

• Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.
  ● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.

■When using a car wash (vehicles with a smart key system)

If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)

• Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
  Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for long distance in the hot weather.
  ●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

CAUTION

■When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.

■Precautions regarding the Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction. If this occurs, consult your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels etc.)

●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
- If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
- If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
- If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
- If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

• If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
  ● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.

■Cleaning the exterior lights

• Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
• Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■Antenna installation and removal precautions

●Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
- When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also, before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

Cleaning the leather areas

• Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
• Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
  Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
  ●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
  ●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

• Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
  ●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.
• Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

■ Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.

■Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

Water in the vehicle

● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
- Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P. 40)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■Cleaning detergents

• Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
  • Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
• Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior part's painted surface may be damaged.

■Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:

• Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
• Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
• Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

NOTICE

■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with LDA [Lane Departure Alert] and Automatic High Beam)

Be careful not to touch the camera sensor ( P. 227, 245).

If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, LDA and Automatic High Beam may not operate properly or may cause a malfunction.

■Cleaning the inside of the rear window

• Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
• Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner's responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends performing the following maintenance:

General maintenance

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate "Owner's Warranty Information Booklet" or "Owner's Manual Supplement".

■Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the maintenance data.

To reset the data, follow the procedure described below:

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

1 Switch the display to the trip meter A ( P. 90) and then turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
2 While pressing the "DISP" button ( P. 90), turn the engine switch to the "ON" position (do not start the engine because reset mode will be canceled).
3 Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays "000000".

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

1 Switch the display to the trip meter A ( P. 90) and then turn the engine switch off.
2 While pressing the "DISP" button ( P. 90), turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode (do not start the engine because reset mode will be canceled).
3 Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays "000000".

- Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer

●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.
- Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION

■If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.

■Handling of the battery

●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
- Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P. 438)

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Items Check points
Battery	Check the connections. (→P. 438)
Brake fluid	Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (→P. 436)
Engine coolant	Is the engine coolant at the correct level? (→P. 434)
Engine oil	Is the engine oil at the correct level? (→P. 430)
Exhaust system	There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser	The radiator and condenser should be free from foreign objects. (→P. 436)
Washer fluid	Is there sufficient washer fluid? (→P. 442)

Vehicle interior

Items Check points
Accelerator pedal	The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism	When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Brake pedal	Does the brake pedal move smoothly?Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?(→P. 560)Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?(→P. 560)
Brakes	The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.The brakes should work effectively.The brake pedal should not feel spongy.The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.
Head restraints	Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers	Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake	Does the parking brake lever move smoothly?When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Seat belts	Do the seat belts operate smoothly?The seat belts should not be damaged.
Seats	Do the seat controls operate properly?
Steering wheel	Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points
Doors • Do the doors operate smoothly?
Engine hood	• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?
Fluid leaks	• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.
Tires	• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

CAUTION

■If the engine is running

Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (→P. 438)	• W a r m w a t e r• Baking soda• Grease• Conventional wrench(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (→P. 436)	• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
Engine coolant level (→P. 434)	• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technologyFor the U.S.A.:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.For Canada:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level (→P. 430)	• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent• Rag or paper towel• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (→P. 465)	·Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Light bulbs (→P. 476)	·Bulb with same number and watt-age rating as original·Phillips-head screwdriver·Flathead screwdriver·Wrench
Radiator and condenser (→P. 436)	—
Tire inflation pressure (→P. 454)	·Tire pressure gauge·Compressed air source
Washer fluid (→P. 442)	·Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)·Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.

■When working on the engine compartment

• Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
  ●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
• Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.
• Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
• Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

CAUTION

■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in the "ON" position, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 436)

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 436)

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.

NOTICE

■If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

1 Pull the hood lock release lever. The hood will pop up slightly.

IIB6RV003

2 Push the auxiliary catch lever to the left and lift the hood.

Diagram showing a car's side profile and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

3 Hold the hood open by inserting the supporting rod into the slot.

IIB6RV005

CAUTION

■Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

■After installing the support rod into the slot

Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your head or body.

NOTICE

■When closing the hood

Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.

Positioning a floor jack

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

Diagram showing a car undercarriage with a close-up of the steering wheel (no text or symbols present)

Rear

Line drawing of a car's side view with a mechanical lever and inset showing a component being inserted (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

■When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury:

●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustration.

Line drawing of a mechanical lifting tool with no text or symbols

• When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack.
  ●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
• Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported only by the floor jack.
  ●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
• Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
• Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
  ● Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
• Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
• When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath the floor jack.

Engine compartment

Technical diagram of a car engine compartment with numbered parts for identification

① Engine coolant reservoir (→P. 434)
② Engine oil filler cap(→P. 432)
③ Battery ( P. 438)
④ Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 436)
⑤ Fuse box ( P. 465)

⑥ Radiator ( P. 436)
⑦ Condenser ( P. 436)
⑧ Electric cooling fans
⑨ Engine oil level dipstick (→P. 430)
⑩ Washer fluid tank (→P. 442)

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Checking the engine oil

1 Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.

Technical diagram showing mechanical assembly with a magnified detail and directional arrow indicating motion or force

3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Flat dipstick: Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Non-flat dipstick: Reinsert the non-flat dipstick fully with its protruding areas (① in the illustration) pointing towards the engine.

IIE6RV011

5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

① Low
② Normal
③ Excessive

▶ Flat dipstick ▶ Non-flat dipstick

① ② ③ IT43V090

1 2 3 ITI43V092

The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.

6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

■ Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.

ENGINE OIL IIE6RV006

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Engine oil selection →	P. 555
Oil quantity (Low → Full)	1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel

1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

• When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine
• If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
• When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
• When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic

CAUTION

■Used engine oil

●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
- Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
- Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on a regular basis.

■When replacing the engine oil

● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
- Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
- Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

① Reservoir cap
② “FULL” line
③ “LOW” line

If the level is on or below the "LOW" line, add coolant up to the "FULL" line.

① ② FULL LOW ③ IIE6RV007

Coolant selection

Only use "Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.:

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])

Canada:

"Toyota Super Long Life Coolant" is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])

For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

■When the engine is hot

Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

■When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.

Brake fluid

- Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the "MAX" and "MIN" lines on the tank.

Technical illustration of a vehicle engine compartment showing internal components and wiring (no text or symbols)

■ Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

Fluid type FMVSS No.	116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel

■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION

■When filling the reservoir

Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

■If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.

Battery

Check the battery as follows:

Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

① Terminals
② Hold-down clamp

Technical diagram of a mechanical assembly with numbered components and IIE6RV010 label

■Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

• If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
  ● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a smart key system)

The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

1 Shift the shift lever to P.
2 Open and close any of the doors.
3 Restart the engine.

• Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
• Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt.
  ●The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:

• Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
  ●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
  ● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
  ●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
  ●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
• Keep children away from the battery.

■Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

■How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

CAUTION

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

NOTICE

■When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or the low washer fluid warning light comes on, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand pouring liquid into a container (no text or symbols visible)

CAUTION

■When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle's painted surfaces.

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

Checking tires

① New tread
② Treadwear indicator
③ Worn tread

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI" or "Δ" marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

① ② ③ IIB6RV008

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

▶ Vehicles with compact spare tire ▶ Vehicles with full-size spare tire

graph TD
    A[" "] <--> B[" "]
    C[" "] <--> D[" "]
    E[" "] <--> F[" "]
    G[" "] <--> H[" "]
    I[" "] <--> J[" "]
    K[" "] <--> L[" "]
    M[" "] <--> N[" "]
    O[" "] <--> P[" "]
    Q[" "] <--> R[" "]
    S[" "] <--> T[" "]
    U[" "] <--> V[" "]
    W[" "] <--> X[" "]
    Y[" "] <--> Z[" "]
    AA["ITN43A022"]

graph TD
    A["Left Component"] <--> B["Right Component"]
    B <--> C["Central Circle"]
    D["Left Component"] <--> E["Right Component"]
    E <--> F["Central Circle"]
    style A fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccc,stroke:#333

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation. To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

Tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.

If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a warning light. (→P. 508)

◆Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (→P. 447)

◆Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when changing the tire size:

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key system).

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.

2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. ( P. 561)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

3 Turn the engine switch to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).

4 Press and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.

IIB6RV009

5 Vehicles without a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in the "ON" position and then turn the engine switch to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.

Vehicles with a smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode and then turn the engine switch off.

◆ Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer.

- When to replace your vehicle's tires

Tires should be replaced if:

- You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage

● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

■Replacing tires and wheels (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.

Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■Routine tire inflation pressure checks (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■Maximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P. 566)

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with no text or symbols

Tire types

●Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

●Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 276)

If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly (if equipped)

- In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

• If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.

- Tire chains etc. are equipped.

- Lock nuts are equipped.

- An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.

- If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

- If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.

- If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.

- If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.*

- If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the luggage compartment.*

*: Vehicles with a full-size spare tire only

●Performance may be affected in the following situations.

• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device

- When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be extended.

- When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not function.

■The initialization operation (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

● Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure. Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pressure adjustment.
- If you have accidentally turned the engine switch to the "LOCK" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or off (vehicles with a smart key system) during initialization, it is not necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the engine switch has been turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) for the next time.
- If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initialization again.

■ When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed (if equipped)

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

• When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.
  ● After driving for a certain period of time since the initialization has been completed, the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute.

■Tire pressure warning system certification

TRW Automotive

Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor

FCC ID: GQ4-51T

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

TRW Automotive

Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor

Model: 228408

IC: 1470A-32T

MADE IN U.S.A

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

NOTE:

■When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

• Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns. Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
• Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
• Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
• Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
• Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle. Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
  ● Vehicles with a compact spare tire: Do not tow if your vehicle has a compact spare tire installed.

■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system (if equipped)

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

NOTICE

■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)
- When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound.
- When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.
To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 445)
- Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle's wheels and body.
If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

Tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 561)

TIME AND LANDING INFORMATION BEARING CAPACITY: TOTAL 2 FRONT X REAR 2 The combined weight of occupants and in a line based on account or to charge must be required 100 kg to 1,000 kg. TYPE SIZE COE THE PRESSURE PARTN DIMENSIONS PRESENT ITEMS OFF SHOWN NAME OF ADDITIONAL FEATURES FRONT XXXXXXXXXX XXXP4X EXP38 REAR XXXXXXXXXX XXXP4X EXP38 SPARE XXXXXXXXXX XXXP4X EXP38 AVANT XXXXXXXXXX XXXP4X EXP51 APPBEPB XXXXXXXXXX XXXP4X EXP51 EE RECÔNG XXXXXXXXXX XXXP4X EXP51 IIB6RV011

Inspection and adjustment procedure

① Tire valve
② Tire pressure gauge

Diagram showing car tire installation procedure with labeled parts and magnified detail view

1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back on.

■Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

Do not forget to check the spare.

■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

●Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

• Check only when the tires are cold.
  If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
  ●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
  The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling.
• Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
  ●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
  Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

CAUTION

■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:

Excessive wear
Uneven wear
●Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as possible.

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset*.

Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as "offset".

Toyota does not recommend using the following:

●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions

• Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
• When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
• Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
• Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

■ When replacing wheels (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. ( P. 445)

CAUTION

■When replacing wheels

• Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner's Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
  ● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■When installing the wheel nuts

- Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward. Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Tapered portion ITI41P007

● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

NOTICE

■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer.
- Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

1 Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the engine switch off.

2 Open the glove box. Slide off the damper.

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with an inset view of a device (no text or symbols present)

3 Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the claws.

Technical diagram of a vehicle chassis with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

4 Remove the filter cover.

IIN6RV003

5 Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

UP UP UP IIN6RV004

- Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the "Owner's Manual Supplement" or "Scheduled Maintenance".)

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

■When using the air conditioning system

Make sure that a filter is always installed.

Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

Wireless remote control/electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

●Flathead screwdriver
●Small flathead screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system), or CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system)

Replacing the battery

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system

1 Remove the cover. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Diagram of a cable connector with two pink arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the module.

Diagram of a device with a pink arrow indicating upward motion, no text or symbols present

3 Open the case cover using a coin protected with tape etc. and remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

Diagram showing a device being processed with a tool, featuring a magnified view of the component (no text or symbols present)

▶ Vehicles with a smart key system

1 Take out the mechanical key.

Illustration of a device with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

2 Remove the cover. To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Diagram showing a device being inserted into a cable with pink arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

3 Remove the depleted battery. Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

IID6RV007

■ Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system), or CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system) lithium battery

●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
- Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

■If the key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

●The smart key system (if equipped) and wireless remote control will not function properly.
●The operational range will be reduced.

CAUTION

■Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
- Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
- Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

1 Vehicles without a smart key system:

Turn the engine switch to the "LOCK" position.

Vehicles with a smart key system:

Turn the engine switch off.

2 After a system failure, see "Fuse layout and amperage ratings" for details about which fuse to check. (→P. 468)

3 Open the fuse box cover or instrument panel.

▶ Engine compartment

Push the tabs in and lift the cover off.

IID6RV008

▶ Under the instrument panel

Remove the cover.

Diagram showing a car interior with a highlighted component and a close-up view of the dashboard (no text or symbols present)

▶ Behind the instrument panel Remove the instrument panel.

IID6RV023a

4 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool. Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.

Diagram of a device casing with an arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

5 Check if the fuse is blown.

① Normal fuse
② Blown fuse

Type A and B:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C and D:

Contact your Toyota dealer.

▶ Type A ▶ Type B

Two identical electronic component diagrams labeled ① and ②, each with a base (no text or symbols on the diagrams themselves)

Two identical diagrams of a plastic component with internal cavities, labeled ① and ② (no text or symbols on the components themselves)

▶ Type C ▶ Type D

Two identical mechanical component diagrams labeled ① and ②, showing curved and straight lines with mounting brackets (no text or symbols beyond labels)

① ② IID6RV017

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

■Engine compartment

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 38 39 40 29 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

IID6RV018a

Fuse Ampere Circuit
1	RADIO 20 Audio system
2	ECU-B NO.1 10		Wireless remote control, steering sensor, main body ECU, clock, power back door ECU, tire pressure warning system, driving position memory ECU
3	DOME 10		Engine switch light, interior lights, vanity lights, luggage compartment light, personal lights
4	CDS FAN	30	Electric cooling fans
5	DEICER 20 Windshield wiper de-icer
6	FOG FR	7.5	Fog lights, fog light indicator
7	PTC HTR NO.2 30 PTC heater
8	PTC HTR NO.1 30 PTC heater
9	DEF 30 Rear window defogger, MIR HTR
10	ABS NO.2	30	Vehicle stability control
Fuse		Ampere	Circuit
11	RDI FAN	30	Electric cooling fans
12	ABS NO.1 50 Vehicle stability control
13	HTR 50 Air conditioning system
14	H-LP-MAIN 50		H-LP RH-LO, H-LP LH-LO, H-LP RH-HI, H-LP LH-HI, daytime running lights
15	AMP 30 Audio system
16	ST 30 Starting system
17	EFI-MAIN NO.1 20		Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO.1, EFI NO.2
18	IG2 15		METER, IGN, A/B, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
19	TURN & HAZ 10 Gauges and meters
20	AM2 7.5 IG2, starting system
21	ECU-B NO.2 10		Air conditioning system ECU, gauges and meters, front passenger occupant classification system ECU, smart key system
22	STRG LOCK	10	Steering lock ECU
23	D/C CUT	30	DOME, ECU-B NO.1, RADIO
24	HORN	10 Horn
25	ETCS	10	Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
26	EFI-MAIN NO.2 20		Air flow sensor, fuel pump, rear O_2 sensor
27	ALT-S/ICS	7.5	Electric current sensor
28	EPS	80 Electric power steering
29	ALT 120		ABS NO.1, ABS NO.2, PTC HTR NO.1, PTC HTR NO.2, DEICER, HTR, RDI FAN, CDS FAN, FOG FR, DEF
30	MIR HTR	10	Outside rear view mirror defoggers, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
31	WIPER-S 5		Windshield wiper switch, electric current sensor
32	H-LP LH-LO 10 Left-hand headlight (low beam)
33	H-LP RH-LO 10 Right-hand headlight (low beam)
34	EFI NO.1 10		Air flow meter, purge control VSV, ACIS VSV
35	EFI NO.2 10		Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, key off pump module
36	H-LP LH-HI 10		Left-hand headlight (high beam), head-light high beam indicator
37	H-LP RH-HI 10 Right-hand headlight (high beam)
38	PARE 10 Spare fuse
39	PARE 20 Spare fuse
40	$PARE 30 Spare fuse

■Under the instrument panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 IID6RV021

Fuse Ampere Circuit
1	STOP 7.5 Stop lights
2	S/ROOF 10 Moon roof
3	AM1 5 IG1 NO.1, IG1 NO.2, IG1 NO.3, ACC
4	OBD 7.5 On-board diagnosis system
5	D/L NO.2 20		Power door lock system (side doors), main body ECU
6	F OG RR 7.5 No circuit
7	D/L BACK	10	Power door lock system (back door)
8	P/OUTLET NO.1 15	Power outlets
9	DOOR D	20	Driver's door power window
10	DOOR R/R	20	Right-hand rear door power window
11	DOOR R/L	20	Left-hand rear door power window
12	WIP RR	15	Rear window wiper
13	WSH	15	Windshield washer, rear window washer
14	GAUGE	7.5	Back-up lights, Blind Spot Monitor sys-tem, inside rear view mirror
15	WIP FR	25	Windshield wipers
16	SFT LOCK-ACC	5	Shift lock system ECU
17	P/OUTLET NO.2 15	Power outlets
Fuse		Ampere	Circuit
18	ACC 7.5		Power outlets, audio system, outside rear view mirrors, main body ECU, clock, electric current sensor
19	PANEL 7.5		VSC OFF switch, instrument cluster (indicators and warning lights), BSM main switch, all-wheel drive lock switch, windshield wiper de-icer switch, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, intuitive parking assist ECU, seat heater switches, power outlets, power back door switches, air conditioning system switches, rear window defogger switch, audio system, cup holder light, steering switches, driver module switch
20	TAIL 10		Parking lights, tail lights, license plate lights, side marker lights, fog lights
21	EPS-IG 5 Electric power steering
22	ECU-IG NO.1 10		Dynamic Torque Control AWD system ECU, steering sensor, instrument cluster (indicators and warning lights), shift control switch
23	ECU-IG NO.2 5		Main body ECU, wireless remote control, shift lock system ECU, smart key system, moon roof ECU, audio system, power back door ECU, tire pressure warning system, LDA system, Blind Spot Monitor system
24	HTR-IG 7.5		Air conditioning system ECU, air conditioning system switches, rear window defogger switch
25	-HTR LH 10 Left-hand seat heater
26	-HTR RH 10 Right-hand seat heater
27	IGN	7.5	Fuel pump, multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, stop lights, steering lock system ECU
Fuse Ampere Circuit
28	A/B 7.5		SRS airbag system ECU, front passenger occupant classification system ECU
29	METER 5 Gauges and meters
30	ECU-IG NO.3 7.5		Alternator, anti-lock brake system/vehicle stability control ECU, stop lights, FAN NO.1, FAN NO.2, FAN NO.3, HTR, PTC, DEF, DEICER, windshield wiper de-icer switch

■Behind the instrument panel

1 2 3 4 IID6RV024

Fuse Ampere Circuit
1	P/SEAT F/L	30	Left-hand power seat
2 P	/SEAT F/R 30 No circuit
3 P	BD 30 Power back door
4 P/W MAIN 30			Front power windows, power window main switch

■After a fuse is replaced

• If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (→P. 476)
• If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

CAUTION

■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
- Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.

NOTICE

■Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing for light bulb replacement

Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 562)

Bulb locations

Front

③②⑤①④ IIB6RV013

① Headlight low beam

④ Front side marker light

② Daytime running light/head-light high beam

⑤ Fog light (if equipped)

③ Front turn signal light/parking light

Rear

IIB6RV014 ④ ③ ① ② ⑤

① Tail light
② Back-up light
③ Rear turn signal light

④ Stop/tail light and rear side marker light
⑤ License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs

■Headlight low beams

For the right side only: Remove the securing clip. Then move the washer tank inlet.

IIB6RV015

2 Disconnect the connector and turn the cover counterclockwise.

IIB6RV016

3 Unplug the connector while pulling the lock release.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a connector inserted into a housing (no text or symbols visible)

4 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with a highlighted internal mechanism (no text or symbols)

5 Set the new light bulb. Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert. Turn it clockwise to set.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component inside a circular housing (no text or symbols)

6 Set the connector.

After installing the connector, shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose.

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with a red arrow pointing to a connector (no text or symbols present)

7 Set the connector and install the cover.

Before installing the cover, turn the headlight low beams on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

Mechanical diagram showing two views of a device with a handle and internal components, no text or symbols present.

8 For the right side only: Move the washer tank inlet and install the securing clip.

■Daytime running lights/headlight high beams

For the right side only: Remove the securing clip. Then move the washer tank inlet. (→P. 478)

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Diagram showing a mechanical device interacting with a car wheel, with no visible text or symbols.

3 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

Diagram of a mechanical device with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

4 Replace the light bulb, and install the bulb base.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert.

Technical line drawing of a car brake system with hoses and calipers (no text or symbols)

5 Turn and secure the bulb base.

Shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the headlights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve or connector with red directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols present)

6 For the right side only: Move the washer tank inlet and install the securing clip.

■Front turn signal lights/parking lights

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

IIB6RV026

2 Remove the light bulb.

Diagram showing a plug being inserted into a cable, with a pink arrow indicating the insertion direction (no text or symbols present)

3 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■Front side maker lights

1 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Diagram showing a car seatbelt mechanism inside a vehicle, with no visible text or symbols

2 Remove the light bulb.

Illustration of a mechanical connector with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

3 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■Fog lights (if equipped)

1 To allow enough working space, turn the steering wheel to the opposite side of the bulb to be replaced.

Turn the steering wheel to the left when replacing the right side light bulb, and turn the steering wheel to the right when replacing the left side light bulb.

2 Remove the fender liner clip and open the fender liner.

Illustration of a car tire being pulled with a pink arrow, showing motion (no text or symbols)

IIB6RV031

3 Unplug the connector while pressing the lock release.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with a red arrow indicating motion direction (no text or symbols present)

4 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Mechanical component diagram showing a piston assembly with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

5 Set the new light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb with the mounting, and insert. Turn it clockwise to set.

Mechanical diagram showing two identical configurations of a valve mechanism, one with a red arrow indicating force or motion, the other with a pink arrow (no text or symbols)

6 Set the connector.

After installing the connector, shake the bulb base gently to check that it is not loose, turn the fog lights on once and visually confirm that no light is leaking through the mounting.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a belt drive mechanism with a red arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

7 Reinstall the fender liner and install the clip.

Insert the clip and turn to lock.

Two-step diagram showing a hand holding a magnifying glass and a finger pressing a button, with no visible text or symbols.

■ Stop/tail lights and rear side marker lights, and rear turn signal lights

1 Open the back door and remove the bolts, and remove the lamp assembly by pulling it directly backward from the rear of the vehicle.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a red arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

▶ Stop/tail lights and rear side ▶ Rear turn signal lights marker lights

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a valve mechanism inside a vehicle (no text or symbols)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components with a red arrow indicating a specific part (no text or symbols present)

3 Remove the light bulb.

▶ Stop/tail lights and rear side ▶ Rear turn signal lights marker lights

Diagram showing a connector being inserted into a body part, with no visible text or symbols

Diagram showing a connector being inserted into a terminal socket (no text or symbols present)

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■Tail lights and back-up lights

1 Open the back door and remove the cover. To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with rag.

Diagram of a car interior showing a hand adjusting a screwdriver (no text or symbols present)

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

▶ Tail lights

▶ Back-up lights

Diagram of a mechanical or electrical component with a pink arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

Diagram of a car interior showing engine compartment with a red arrow pointing to a valve (no text or symbols present)

3 Remove the light bulb.

▶ Tail lights

▶ Back-up lights

Diagram of a plug with a pink arrow indicating insertion or disassembly (no text or symbols present)

Diagram showing a mechanical component being inserted into a plug, with no visible text or symbols

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

License plate lights

1 Open the back door and remove the cover.

To prevent damage, cover the tip of the screwdriver with rag.

Diagram showing a car body panel being inserted into a tool, with an inset highlighting the component (no text or symbols present)

2 Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

▶ Left side ▶ Right side

Technical line drawing of a vehicle seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

3 Remove the light bulb.

Diagram of a plug with a connector and a close-up view showing the connector (no text or symbols)

4 When installing, reverse the steps listed.

■Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

●Side turn signal lights (if equipped)
●High mounted stoplight

■After moving the washer tank inlet

After replacing the bulbs, return the washer tank inlet to its original position with the clip.

① Insert
② Press

① ② IIB6RV051

LED Lights

The side turn signal lights (if equipped) and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.

CAUTION

■Replacing light bulbs

●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
- Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion. If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

■To prevent damage or fire

● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
- Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.

When trouble arises

7

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ..... 492

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency.... 493

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed 495

If you think something is wrong..... 501

Fuel pump shut off system 502

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds .... 503

If you have a flat tire...... 519

If the engine will not start.... 536

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.... 538

If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system).... 539

If the vehicle battery is discharged.... 542

If your vehicle overheats... 546

If the vehicle becomes stuck 549

Emergency flashers

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signals will flash.

To turn them off, press the switch once again.

IIN7RV001

Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the battery may discharge.

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.

▶ If the shift lever is shifted to N

3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4 Stop the engine.

▶ If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
4 Vehicles without a smart key system:

Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the "ACC" position.

RUSH IIE7RV008

4 Vehicles with a smart key system:

To stop the engine, press and hold the engine switch for 2 consecutive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.

ENGINE START STOP Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more IIE7RV009

5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

CAUTION

■If the engine has to be turned off while driving

●Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
● Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

2WD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be in good conditions. (P. 497, 500)

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

AWD models: If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a towing dolly. (P. 497, 500)

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.

• The engine is operating but the vehicle will not move.
• The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet(s). This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle's wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

Line drawing of a car's front bumper with arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Installing towing eyelet

1 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.

Diagram of a mechanical device with a curved arrow indicating motion, set against a textured background (no text or symbols)

2 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

Diagram showing a mechanical component with rotational arrows and a circular motion indicator (no text or symbols)

3 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.

Diagram of a rope knot with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.

IIB7RV040

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

▶ From the front (2WD models)

▶ From the front (AWD models)

Release the parking brake. Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

Silhouette illustration of a truck and car with a charging plug, no text or symbols present

Silhouette illustration of a truck and a car with wheels, no text or symbols present

From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

Silhouette illustration of a truck and car on a road, no text or symbols present

Using a flat bed truck

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45^ .

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

Silhouette of a flatbed truck with a car on its side, no text or symbols present

■Before emergency towing

1 Release the parking brake.
2 Shift the shift lever to N.
3 Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the "ACC" (engine off) or the "ON" (engine running) position.

Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or IGNITION ON (engine running) mode.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■Caution while towing

● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
- If the engine is not running the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

■Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.

NOTICE

To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission and Dynamic Torque Control AWD system (AWD models) when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

2WD models: Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission. If towing from the rear, use a towing dolly.

AWD models: Never tow this vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission and Dynamic Torque Control AWD system. Use a towing dolly.

IIB7RV045

IIB7RV046

■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

■To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

■Recreational towing (behind motor home, etc.)

Never dinghy tow your vehicle to prevent causing serious damage to the Dynamic Torque Control AWD system (AWD models) and transmission. (→P. 196)

■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transfer (AWD models) and transmission in emergency towing

Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transfer (AWD models) and transmission.

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●High engine coolant temperature warning light comes on

Audible symptoms

●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine

Operational symptoms

●Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

Fuel pump shut off system

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

▶ Vehicles without a smart key system
1 Turn the engine switch to the "ACC" or "LOCK" position.
2 Restart the engine.
▶ Vehicles with a smart key system
1 Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or off.
2 Restart the engine.

NOTICE

Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light	Warning light/Details
	Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*Low brake fluidMalfunction in the brake systemThis light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.
(4KXD)

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more.

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light	Warning light/Details
	Charging system warning lightIndicates a malfunction in the vehicle's charging system

Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Warning light	Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)(Canada)	Malfunction indicator lampIndicates a malfunction in:The electronic engine control system;The electronic throttle control system; orThe electronic automatic transmission control system
	Low engine oil pressure warning lightIndicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
	SRS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:The SRS airbag system;The front passenger occupant classification system; orThe seat belt pretensioner system
(U.S.A.)(Canada)	ABS warning lightIndicates a malfunction in:The ABS; orThe brake assist systemElectric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
(Yellow)	LDA warning lights (if equipped)Indicates a malfunction in the lane departure alertStop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine switch off and then turn it to the “ON” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) again to reset the LDA system.
	Slip indicatorIndicates a malfunction in:The VSC system;The TRAC system; orThe AUTO LSD functionThe light will flash when the VSC or the TRAC system is operating.
	Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light (if equipped)Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high if the light comes onIndicates a malfunction in the automatic transmission system if the light flashes
	BSM warning light (if equipped)Indicates a malfunction in the Blind Spot Monitor
(Yellow)	Cruise control warning lightIndicates a malfunction in the cruise control
(Yellow)	Automatic High Beam warning light (if equipped)Indicates a malfunction in the Automatic High Beam
(Flashes in yellow for 15 seconds.)	Smart key system indicator light (if equipped)Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system
(Flashes)	Intuitive parking assist indicator (warning buzzer)* (if equipped)Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist

*: The corner and center indicators flash after the indicator for the malfunctioning sensor flashes and the vehicle indicator turns off while the buzzer sounds for approximately 7 seconds.

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light goes off.

Warning light	Warning light/Details Correction	procedure
	Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*1Indicates that a door is not fully closed	Check that all the doors are closed.
	Seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts	Fasten the seat belt.If the front passenger's seat is occupied, the front passenger's seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) off.
	Low fuel level warning lightIndicates remaining fuel is approximately 2.4 gal. (9.0 L, 2.0 Imp. gal.) or less	Refuel the vehicle.
	High engine coolant temperature warning lightIndicates that the engine is almost overheating.	→P. 546
	Low washer fluid warning lightIndicates low level of washer fluid.	Fill the tank.
MAINTREQD(U.S.A.)	Maintenance required reminder lightIndicates that maintenance is required according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule.*3
	Illuminates for about 3 seconds and then flashes for about 15 seconds approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the maintenance data has been reset.	If necessary, perform maintenance.
	Comes on and remains on if the distance driven exceeds 5000 miles (8000 km) after the maintenance data has been reset.(The indicator will not work properly unless the maintenance data has been reset.)	Perform the necessary maintenance.Please reset the maintenance data after the maintenance is performed.(→P. 413)
	Tire pressure warning light (if equipped)
	When the light comes on:Low tire inflation pressure such asNatural causes (→P. 515)Flat tire (→P. 519)	Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
	When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system	Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
	Dynamic Torque Control AWD system warning light (if equipped)
	When the light blinks: The system has been overloaded and front-wheel drive has been automatically engaged.	Drop your speed or stop the vehicle until the light stops blinking. (Do not stop the engine.)
	When the light comes on: Malfunction in the Dynamic Torque Control AWD system.	Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.
	Intuitive parking assist indicator (warning buzzer)*4 (if equipped) Indicates that the intuitive parking assist sensor is dirty or covered with ice.	Clean the sensors.

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or more with any door open.

*2: Driver's seat belt buzzer:

The driver's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12mph (20km / h) , the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

Front passenger's seat belt buzzer:

The front passenger's seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*3: Refer to the separate "Scheduled Maintenance Guide" or "Owner's Manual Supplement" for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

*4: The corner and center indicators turn on and remain on after the indicator for the malfunctioning sensor turns on and the vehicle indicator turns off while the buzzer sounds for approximately 7 seconds.

Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with a smart key system)

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light goes off.

Interior buzzer	Exterior buzzer	Warning light	Warning light/Details	Correction procedure
Continuous Continuous		(Flashes in yellow)	Smart key system indicator lightThe electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver's door was opened and closed while any shift position other than P was selected without turning off the engine switch.	· Change shift position to P.· Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.
Once 3 times		(Flashes in yellow)	Smart key system indicator lightThe electronic key was carried outside the vehicle and the driver's door was opened and closed while the shift position P was selected without turning off the engine switch.	Turn the engine switch off or bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.
Once 3 times		(Flashes in yellow)	Smart key system indicator lightIndicates that a door other than the driver's door has been opened and closed with the engine switch in any mode other than off and the electronic key outside of the detection area.	Confirm the location of the electronic key.
Once	Continuous(5 seconds)	(Flashes in yellow)	Smart key system indicator lightAn attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the engine switch off.	Turn the engine switch off and lock the doors again.
Once —		(Flashes in yellow for 15 seconds)	Smart key system indicator lightIndicates that the electronic key is not present when attempting to start the engine.	Confirm the location of the electronic key.
9 times —		(Flashes in yellow)	Smart key system indicator lightAn attempt was made to drive when the regular key was not inside the vehicle.	Confirm that the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
Once —		(Flashes in yellow for 15 seconds)	Smart key system indicator lightIndicates that the electronic key battery is low.	Replace the battery. (→P. 462)
Once —		(Flashes quickly in green for 15 seconds)	Smart key system indicator lightIndicates that the steering lock has not been released.	Release the steering lock. (→P. 204)
Once —		(Flashes in yellow for 30 seconds)	Smart key system indicator lightWhen the doors were unlocked with the mechanical key and then the engine switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle.The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the engine switch was pressed two consecutive times.	Touch the electronic key to the engine switch while depressing the brake pedal.

■SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (rear), driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system, "AIR BAG ON" indicator light, "AIR BAG OFF" indicator light, front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, driver's seat belt pretensioner, front passenger's seat belt pretensioner and force limiter, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P. 40)

■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

●Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

●Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

When the battery charge becomes insufficient of the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.

■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■When a tire is replaced with a compact spare tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire and the tire pressure warning system)

The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the standard tire and adjust the tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few minutes.

Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

→P. 449

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when the engine switch is turned to the "ON" position (vehicles without a smart key system) or IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

■Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

CAUTION

If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on

The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.

If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.

If the tire pressure warning light comes on (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

• Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
  ● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

CAUTION

■Maintenance of the tires (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

CAUTION

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

■Precaution when installing a different tire (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

When differently constructed tires or tires of different makers, models or tread patterns are installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

If you have a flat tire

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided.

For details about tires: →P. 443

CAUTION

If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

• Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
  ●Set the parking brake.
  ●Shift the shift lever to P.
• Stop the engine.
  ● Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P. 492)

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Technical diagram of a car rearview assembly with labeled parts and an inset showing internal components

① Tool bag

③ Spare tire

② Jack

CAUTION

■Using the tire jack

Observe the following precautions.

Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.

• Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.
  ●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
  Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

●Put the jack properly in its jack point.

- Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.

- Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

- Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.

- When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

- Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

- Stop the vehicle on firm, flat and level ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.

- When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.

Taking out the jack and tool bag

1 Remove the cover.

Diagram of a car interior showing a vent with a red arrow indicating direction, no text or symbols present

2 Take out the tool bag.

Diagram of a car interior showing a hand valve mechanism with a pink arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

3 Take out the jack.

① For loosening

② For tightening

① ② IIB7RV017

Taking out the spare tire

1 Remove the rear deck board.

Diagram of a car interior showing airflow or fluid flow with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

2 Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

Diagram of a car back view showing internal components including a valve and wheel (no text or labels)

CAUTION

■When storing the spare tire

Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

Replacing a flat tire

1 Chock the tires.

Line drawing of a car with a headlamp and sensor array (no text or symbols)

Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front	Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
	Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear	Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
	Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

2 For vehicles with full wheel ornament, remove the wheel ornament using the wrench.

To protect the wheel ornament, place a rag between the wrench and the wheel ornament.

Illustration of a car tire being cleaned with a tool, showing the wheel rim and tire (no text or symbols)

3 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

Illustration of a car tire being adjusted for a wheel, showing mechanical components (no text or symbols)

4 Turn the tire jack portion ④ by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point. The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.

IIB7RV022

5 Assemble the jack handle extension.

IIB7RV061

6 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Diagram showing car wheel and suspension mechanism with arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

7 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

Diagram of a car wheel being adjusted for steering wheel, showing tire movement and angle measurement (no text or symbols)

CAUTION

■Replacing a flat tire

• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
  ●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (→P. 458)

■ Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power back door (if equipped)

In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door main switch ( P. 127). Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.

Installing the spare tire

1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.

Technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with hands cleaning a component (no text or symbols)

2 Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.

When replacing a steel wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion Disc wheel seat IIB7RV026

When replacing an aluminum wheel with a steel wheel, tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Tapered portion Disc wheel seat IIB7RV027

When replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel, turn the wheel nuts until the washers come into contact with the disc wheel.

Disc wheel Washer IIB7RV028

3 Lower the vehicle.

Mechanical diagram showing a car suspension system with a curved arrow indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols present)

4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

76 ft·lbf (103 N·m, 10.5 kgf·m)

IIB7RV030

5 For vehicles with full wheel ornament, reinstall the wheel ornament.*

Align the cutout of the wheel ornament with the valve stem as shown.

*: The wheel ornament cannot be installed on the compact spare tire.

Diagram showing a car tire being inserted into a component, with an inset magnified view of the tire (no text or symbols present)

6 Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

Stowing the flat tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire)

▶ Type A

For vehicles with an aluminum wheel: Before stowing the flat tire, remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse side.

Diagram of a car wheel with a directional arrow indicating motion, no text or symbols present

2 Place the flat tire on the deck board, hook the end of the belt which is not forked to the cargo hook on the far left side.

Diagram of a car interior showing a fan assembly and earbell insertion (no text or symbols)

3 Pass the belts from between the wheel spokes through the center hole.

Diagram of a car interior showing hoses and a central fan component (no text or symbols)

4 Hook one end of the forked belt to the cargo hook on the far right side, and the other end to the cargo hook on the near left side.

Diagram of car engine components with three inset views showing internal gear assembly (no text or labels)

After stowing the flat tire, check that the tire and belts are secured.

▶ Type B

For vehicles with an aluminum wheel: Before stowing the flat tire, remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse side.

Diagram of a car wheel with a red arrow pointing to a small circular component (no text or symbols)

2 Place the flat tire on the deck board, hook one end of the belt to the cargo hook on the far left side.

Diagram of a car interior with a fan and plug, showing mechanical components (no text or symbols)

3 Pass the belts from between the wheel spokes through the center hole.

Diagram of a car wheel assembly with hoses and a valve, no visible text or symbols

4 Hook the other end of the belt to the cargo hook on the near right side.

Diagram of a car tire being installed with a tool, showing mechanical components and a magnified view (no text or symbols)

5 Pull the belt as shown in the illustration to secure the tire.

Diagram showing a car wheel assembly with a magnified inset of the cable being inserted (no text or symbols present)

■The compact spare tire (if equipped)

● The compact spare tire is identified by the label "TEMPORARY USE ONLY" on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire. (→P. 561)

■When using the compact spare tire (if equipped)

As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

■When the compact spare tire is equipped (if equipped)

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires.

If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with a compact spare tire)

Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:

1 Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
2 Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehicle.
3 Fit tire chains to the front tires.

CAUTION

■When using the compact spare tire (if equipped)

●Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
- Do not use more than one compact spare tire simultaneously.
- Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.

■When the compact spare tire is attached (if equipped)

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

• ABS & Brake assist
• VSC
• TRAC
- Cruise control
• EPS
• LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (if equipped)

• Rear view monitor system (if equipped)
• Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
  • Navigation system (if equipped)

Also, not only can the following system not be utilized fully, it may actually negatively effect the drive-train components:

• Dynamic Torque Control AWD system (AWD models)

CAUTION

■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire (if equipped)

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

■After using the tools and jack

Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

■When stowing the flat tire (vehicles with a compact spare tire)

● Make sure the rear seatbacks are in their original position.
- Secure it using a tire tie-down belt. Otherwise, the flat tire may fly out in case of sudden braking or an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

- Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire (if equipped)

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

■When replacing the tires (vehicles with the tire pressure warning system)

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed ( P. 197, 200), consider each of the following points:

The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

• There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle's tank. Refuel the vehicle.
  ●The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures. (→P. 197, 200)
  ●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P. 77)

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 542)
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with a smart key system).

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. (→P. 537)

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 542)

●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehicles with a smart key system).

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart key system)

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally:

1 Set the parking brake.
2 Shift the shift lever to P.
3 Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.
4 Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:

1 Set the parking brake.
2 Vehicles without a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to the "ACC" position.
Vehicles with a smart key system:
Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode.

3 Depress the brake pedal.

4 Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Technical diagram showing a tool interacting with a mechanical component, with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or assembly.

5 Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

IIE7RV006

If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system)

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted ( P. 107) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors

Use the mechanical key

(→P. 97) in order to perform the following operations:

① Locks all the doors
② Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

① ② IID7RV001

Starting the engine

1 Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

2 Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the engine switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the engine switch will turn to IGNITION ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization setting, the engine switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Line drawing of a hand holding a small device inside a vehicle gear (no text or symbols visible)

3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that the smart key system indicator light (green) turns on.

4 Press the engine switch.

In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Toyota dealer.

■Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.

■Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (→P. 462)

■Changing engine switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step ☐above. The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed.(→P. 201)

■When the electronic key does not work properly

● Make sure that the smart key system has not been deactivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features: →P. 579)
- Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P. 106)

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle's battery is discharged.

You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.

1 Open the hood. ( P. 425)
2 Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:

Diagram of car engine battery wiring with numbered components and a magnified inset showing electrical connections

① Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.
② Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
③ Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
④ Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.

3 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

4 Vehicles with a smart key system only: Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the engine switch off.

5 Vehicles without a smart key system: Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle.

Vehicles with a smart key system:

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

6 Once the vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■To prevent battery discharge

●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.

● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.

Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)

■ When recharging or replacing the battery (vehicles with a smart key system)

In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
●The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
●The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off. If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.

■When the battery is removed or discharged

● The power back door (if equipped) must be initialized. (→P. 129)
● The moon roof (if equipped) must be initialized. (→P. 161)

CAUTION

■Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:

● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
- Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.
- Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.
- Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.

CAUTION

Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:

• When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
• Do not lean over the battery.
  In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.
  ●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.
  ●Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

■When handling jumper cables

When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fans or engine drive belt.

If your vehicle overheats

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:

● High engine coolant temperature warning light comes on (→P. 507), or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
●Steam comes out from under the hood.

Follow the correction procedure as described below:

1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the engine.
2 If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

① Radiator
② Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

① ② IIE7RV001

4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the "FULL" and "LOW" lines on the reservoir.

① Reservoir
② "FULL"
③ "LOW"

5 Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.

① FULL LOW ② ③ IIE7RV012

Mechanical assembly diagram showing engine components and a valve (no text or labels)

6 Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

7 If the fans are not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

■When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

• If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
• Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
• Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

NOTICE

■When adding engine coolant

Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

■To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
- Do not use commercially available coolant additives.

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:

1 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.
2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.
3 Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.
4 Restart the engine.
5 AWD models: Activate all-wheel drive lock mode. (→P. 259)
6 Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Turn off TRAC and/or VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. (→P. 262)

2WD models

AUTO LSD OFF IIB7RV058a

AWD models

TRAC OFF IIB7RV057

CAUTION

■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

● Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.
- If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

Vehicle specifications

8

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.)...... 552

Fuel information 563

Tire information.... 566

8-2. Customization

Customizable features ..... 579

8-3. Items to initialize

Items to initialize .... 587

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length 179.9 in. (4570 mm)
Overall width 72.6 in. (1845 mm)
Overall height*	Without the roof luggage carrier	65.4 in. (1660 mm)
	With the roof lug-gage carrier	67.1 in. (1705 mm)
Wheelbase 104.7 in. (2660 mm)
Front and rear tread	17-inch tires 61.8 in. (1570 mm)
	18-inch tires 61.4 in. (1560 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage)		900 lb. (410 kg)
Trailer Weight Rating (Trailer weight + cargo weight)		1500 lb. (680 kg)

*: Unladen vehicle

Vehicle identification

■Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.

Diagram showing a car's side profile with an arrow pointing to a rectangular object, no text or symbols present

On some models, this number is stamped under the right-hand front seat.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with an inset showing the lever mechanism (no text or symbols present)

This number is also on the Certification Label.

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, door, and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols)

Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

Diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating direction, no visible text or symbols

Engine

Model 2.5 L 4-cylinder (2AR-FE)
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke	3.54 × 3.86 in. (90.0 × 98.0 mm)
Displacement 152.2 cu.in.	(2494 cm 3)
Valve clearance	Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension

Fuel

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)	15.9 gal. (60 L, 13.2 Imp.gal.)

Lubrication system

Oil capacity(Drain and refill — Reference*)
With filter	4.6 qt. (4.4 L, 3.9 Imp.qt.)
Without filter	4.2 qt. (4.0 L, 3.5 Imp.qt.)

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

■ Engine oil selection

"Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Motor Oil" or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

OW-20 Outside temperature C -29 -18 -7 4 16 27 38 F -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 ITNOIL055

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE FOR GASOLINE ENGINES CERTIFIED ITNOIL050

Cooling system

Capacity 7.2 qt. (6.8 L, 6.0 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type	Use either of the following:“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technologyDo not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plugMake DENSO SK16HR11
Gap 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

■Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

Electrical system

BatteryOpen voltage at 68°F(20°C):	12.6 — 12.8 V Fully charged12.2 — 12.4 V Half charged11.8 — 12.0 V Discharged(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates 5 A max.

Rear differential (AWD models)

Oil capacity 0.5 qt. (0.5 L,	0.4 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity	Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

Your Toyota vehicle is filled with "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" at the factory.

Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Automatic transaxle

Fluid capacity* 6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

■Automatic transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Transfer (AWD models)

Oil capacity 0.48 qt. (0.45	L, 0.40 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity	Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent

Your Toyota vehicle is filled with "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" at the factory.

Use Toyota approved "Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil" or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Brakes

Pedal clearance^*1	► 15-inch front brake models3.74 in. (95 mm) Min.► 16-inch front brake models4.02 in. (102 mm) Min.
Pedal free play	0.04 — 0.24 in. (1 — 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*2	6 — 8 clicks
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.	116 DOT 3

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is operating.
*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45 lbf (200 N, 20 kgf)

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels

17-inch tires

Tire size 225/65R17 102H
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm ^2 or bar)Rear: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm ^2 or bar)
Wheel size	17 × 6 1/2J (steel wheel),17 × 7 J (aluminum wheel)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf	(103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

18-inch tires

Tire size 235/55R18 99H
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm ^2 or bar)Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm ^2 or bar)
Wheel size 18 × 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

▶ Compact spare tire (if equipped)

Tire size T165/80R17 104M
Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)	60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm ^2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 × 4T
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf	(103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

Light bulbs

	Light bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior	HeadlightsHigh beamLow beam	90059005	6060	AA
	Fog lights* — 19 B
	Front turn signal lights/parking lights	7444 28/8 C
	Front side marker lights — 5 D
	Stop/tail lights and rear side marker lights	7443 21/5 D
	Tail lights 194 5 D
	Rear turn signal lights	7440	21 D
	Back-up lights	921	16 D
	License plate lights	168 5 D
Interior	Vanity lights	— 8 D
	Interior light (front)/personal lights	— 5 D
	Interior light (rear)	— 8 E
	Luggage compartment light	— 5 E

A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: H16 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
E: Double end bulbs
*: If equipped

Fuel information

You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.

Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

Gasoline quality standards

● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.

■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

●Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
- All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPA's lowest additives concentration program.
●Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

■ Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

■Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

●Use only gasoline containing a maximum of 10% ethanol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% ethanol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol. E45 (15% ethanol) E50 (50% ethanol) E85 (85% ethanol)

• If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.
  ●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

If your engine knocks

• Consult your Toyota dealer.
• You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

■Notice on fuel quality

• Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.
• Do not use leaded gasoline.
  Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle's three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
• Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
  Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
  ● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
  At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

■Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

▶ Full-size tire

MFS 225/85R7-102H MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMPERATURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMASURE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE MAX LEAD MAX TRACTION MAX TEMURATE

▶ Compact spare tire

TEMPORARY USE ONLY T165/80R17 10MM MINATE TO XXX KPAXXPSH MAXACTURPER NAME IIB8RV002

① Tire size ( P. 569)
② DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) ( P. 568)
③ Location of treadwear indicators ( P. 443)
④ Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.
⑤ Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has "RADIAL" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "RADIAL" is a bias-ply tire.
⑥ TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
⑦ Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 573)
⑧ Maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( P. 573)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
⑨ Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see "Uniform Tire Quality Grading" that follows.
⑩ Summer tires or all season tires ( P. 448)
An all season tire has "M+S" on the sidewall. A tire not marked "M+S" is a summer tire.
⑪ "TEMPORARY USE ONLY"

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

① DOT symbol*
② Tire Identification Number (TIN)
③ Tire manufacturer's identification mark
④ Tire size code
⑤ Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
⑥ Manufacturing week
⑦ Manufacturing year

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

graph TD
    A["DOT"] --> B["①"]
    C["EMJR"] --> D["③"]
    C --> E["④"]
    F["LAN0211"] --> G["⑤"]
    F --> H["⑥"]
    F --> I["⑦"]
    J["②"] --> K["#"]
    style J fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Tire size

■Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

① Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use)
② Section width (millimeters)
③ Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
④ Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
⑤ Wheel diameter (inches)
⑥ Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
⑦ Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

■Tire dimensions

① Section width
② Tire height
③ Wheel diameter

T165/80 R 17 104M ①②③④⑤⑥⑦ IIB4RV004

① ② ③ IIB8RV005

Tire section names

① Bead
② Sidewall
③ Shoulder
④ Tread
⑤ Belt
⑥ Inner liner
⑦ Reinforcing rubber
⑧ Carcass
⑨ Rim lines
⑩ Bead wires
⑪ Chafer

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 IIB8RV006

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

■DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

■Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pressure	Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Accessory weight	The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of hybrid transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Curb weight	The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle weight	The sum of:(a) Curb weight(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight	150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution	Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options weight	The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Rim	A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)	Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim	diameter and width
Rim type designation	The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)	The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on the tire	The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side	The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Bead	The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation	A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
Bias ply tire	A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass	The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking	The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord The strands forming	the plies in the tire
Cord separation	The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Cracking	Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT	A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire	A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner	The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation	The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
Intended outboard sidewall	(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire	A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating	The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating	The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible inflation pressure	The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim	The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Open splice	Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width	The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire	A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation	A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
Pneumatic tire	A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire	A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire	A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
Section width	The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall	That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation	The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire	A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall
Test rim	The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tread	That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
Tread rib	A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Tread separation Pulling	away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators (TWI)	The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture	The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

*: Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants	Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants	Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in	front
5 through 10 3		2 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5		2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
16 through 20 7		2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your Toyota dealer.

Customizable features

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

① Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be changed using the Display Audio system (For further information on customizing settings using the Display Audio system, refer to the “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.)
② Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available

Item Function		Default setting	Custom-ized setting	1	2
Door lock(→P. 120,539)	Unlocking using a key	Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps	All doors unlocked in one step	—	O
	Speed-detecting automatic door lock function (vehicles with a smart key system)	Off On O O
	Shifting gears to a position other than P locks all doors	On Off O O
	Shifting gears to P unlocks all doors	On Off O O
	Opening the driver's door unlocks all doors	Off On — O
Smart key system*1(→P. 99) and wireless remote control (→P. 113)	Operation signal (Buzzers)*2	Level 7	Off	—	O
			Level 1 to 6
	Operation signal (Emergency flashers)	On Off	— O
	Time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked	60 seconds	Off	—	O
			30 seconds
			120 seconds
	Open door reminder buzzer (When locking the vehicle)	On Off	— O
	Unlocking operation	Driver's door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two steps	All doors unlocked in one step	—	O
	Alarm (panic mode) On Off	— O
	Wireless remote control On	Off — O
Smart key system*1(→P. 99)	Smart key system On Off —	O
	Select doors to unlock*3	Driver's door	All the doors	—	O
	Number of consecutive door lock operations	2 times	As many as desired	—	O
Driving position memory(→P. 143)	Selecting the door linking driving position memory with door unlock operation*1	Driver's door	All doors —	O
Moon roof*1(→P. 161)	Moon roof open reminder function	On Off —	O

Item Function	Default setting	Custom-ized setting	1	2
Automatic light control system(→P. 217)	Light sensor sensitivity*1	Level 3 Level 1 to 5 O O
	Time elapsed before the headlights automatically turn off after the doors are closed	30 seconds	Off	O
			60 seconds
			90 seconds
	Automatic High Beam^*1	On Off — O
Lights(→P. 217)	Daytime running lights*4	On Off O O
Turn signal lever(→P. 214)	Time of flashing of the lane change signal flash-ers	3 Off — O
Instrument cluster(→P. 87)	Eco Driving Indicator Light*5	On Off — O
Multi-information display(→P. 89)	Switching the display when the average fuel consumption is displayed	Engine coolant tempera-ture gauge	Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display	— O
Automatic air condition-ing system*1(→P. 295)	A/C Auto switch operation On Off — O
	Switching between out-side air and recirculated air mode linked to “AUTO” switch operation	On Off — O

Item Function		Default setting	Custom-ized setting	1	2
Illumination (→P. 377)	Interior lights illumination control*6	On Off	— O
	Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off	15 seconds	7.5 seconds	—	O
			30 seconds
	Operation after the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position (vehicles without a smart key system) or engine switch is turned off (vehicles with a smart key system)	On Off	— O
	Operation when the doors are unlocked	On Off	— O
	Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart key system)	On Off	— O
	Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used for dimming the meter lights etc.*1	Standard -2 to 2 O O
	Sensitivity of the ambient light sensor used for brightening the meter lights etc.*1	Standard -2 to 2 O O
Seat belt reminder (→P. 510)	Vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer	On Off — O

^1 : If equipped
*2: For vehicles with the power back door and/or driving position memory system, the default setting is "5".
^3 : Settings that can be changed by electronic key ( P. 105)
*4: U.S.A. only
^*5 : Settings that can be changed by "DISP" button. ( P. 92)
*6: Settings that can be changed only for vehicles with the power back door and/or driving position memory system

Vehicle customization

- When the speed-detecting automatic door lock function and shift position linked door locking function (shifting gears to a position other than P locks all doors) are both on, the door lock operates as follows.

• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P , all the doors will be locked.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the speed-detecting automatic door lock function would not operate.

• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the speed-detecting automatic door lock function will operate.

• When the smart key system (if equipped) is off, the selecting doors to unlock cannot be customized.

• When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the automatic door lock function (time elapsed before the automatic door lock function is activated if a door is not opened after being unlocked) activates, the signals will be generated in accordance with the operation signal (buzzers) and the operation signal (emergency flashers) settings.

CAUTION

During customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.

Items to initialize

The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:

Item When to initialize Reference
Power back door (if equipped)	After reconnecting or changing the batteryAfter changing a fuse	P. 129
Moon roof (If equipped)	After reconnecting or changing the batteryAfter changing a fuse	P. 161
Maintenance data (U.S.A. only)	After the maintenance is performed	P. 413
Tire pressure warning system (If equipped)	When changing the tire size	P. 446

For owners

9

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners.... 590

Seat belt instructions

for Canadian owners

(in French).... 591

SRS airbag instructions

for Canadian owners

(in French).... 593

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Line drawing of a person sitting on a chair with a string, no text or symbols present

Entretien et soin

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

Technical diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification

Technical diagram of a car with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference

IID1RV006

ATTENTION

■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

IID1RV007

IID1RV009

IID1RV010

ATTENTION

■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to the "Display Audio System Owner's Manual" for information regarding the equipment listed below.

- Navigation system

- Audio system

- Rear view monitor system

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

• If you lose your keys or mechanical keys, new genuine keys or mechanical keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. (→P. 97)
  ●Vehicles with a smart key system If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. (→P.98)

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

● Is the key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 462)
● Vehicles with a smart key system Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode? When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (→P. 201)
●Vehicles with a smart key system Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle? When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
●The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. (→P. 107)

The rear door cannot be opened

●Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. ( P. 122)

If you think something is wrong

The engine does not start

(vehicles without a smart key system)

● Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 197)
● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 542)

The engine does not start

(vehicles with a smart key system)

●Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (→P. 200)
● Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 200)
●Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P. 103)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 204)
●Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 540)
● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 542)

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake pedal

●Vehicles without a smart key system Is the engine switch in the "ON" position?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the engine switch in the "ON" position: →P. 538
●Vehicles with a smart key system Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode: →P. 538

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped

●Vehicles without a smart key system It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is removed from the engine switch. (→P. 198)

●Vehicles with a smart key system It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P. 203)

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches

●Is the window lock switch pressed? The power window except for the one at the driver's seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 156)

The engine switch is turned off automatically (vehicles with a smart key system)

- The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not operating) for a period of time. ( P. 203)

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

●The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? ( P. 507)
●The brake system warning light is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P. 215)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. ( P. 503)

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle (vehicles with a smart key system)

●Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

Check the smart key system warning lights. (→P. 511)

A warning light turns on

●When a warning light turns on, refer to P. 503.

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

- Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire. (→P. 519)

The vehicle becomes stuck

●Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. (→P. 549)

Alphabetical index

A

A/C 288, 295

Air conditioning filter 460

Automatic air conditioning system....295

Manual air conditioning system....288

ABS (Anti-lock Brake

System) 260

Function...... 260

Warning light.... 504

Air conditioning filter .....460

Air conditioning

system......288, 295

Air conditioning filter 460

Automatic air conditioning system....295

Manual air conditioning system....288

Airbags 38

Airbag operating conditions ....46

Airbag precautions for your child.... 41

Airbag warning light 504

Correct driving posture .....28

Curtain shield airbag operating conditions ....46

Curtain shield airbag precautions.... 43

Front passenger occupant classification system....51

General airbag precautions ....41

Locations of airbags......38

Modification and disposal of airbags.... 45

Side airbag operating

conditions...... 46

Side airbag precautions...... 43

Side and curtain shield airbags operating

conditions...... 46

Side and curtain shield

airbags precautions...... 43

SRS airbag instructions for

Canadian owners...... 593

SRS airbags 38

All-wheel drive system...... 259

Anchor brackets.... 64

Antennas (smart key

system) 102

Anti-lock brake system

(ABS).... 260

Function 260

Warning light.... 504

Armrest.... 400

Assist grips.... 402

Audio input 345

Audio system.... 308

Audio input.... 345

AUX port/

USB port...... 327, 335, 345

Bluetooth® audio 349

CD player.... 315

iPod 327

Portable music player...... 345

Radio 312

Steering wheel audio

switch 346

USB memory 335

AUTO LSD 261

Automatic air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter 460

Automatic air conditioning

system.... 295

Automatic High Beam .....221

Automatic light control system.... 219

Automatic transmission.....207

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P ....538

S mode 210

AUX port.... 345

B

Back door

Back door.... 125

Wireless remote control.....113

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs....487 Wattage ....562

Battery 438

Battery checking 438

If the vehicle battery is discharged 542

Preparing and checking before winter.... 276

Warning light.... 504

Bluetooth®

Audio system 349

Hands-free system (for cellular phone) ...... 349

Bottle holders 384

Brake

Fluid 436

Parking brake.... 215

Warning light.... 503

Brake assist 260

Break-in tips....166

Brightness control

Instrument panel light control....88

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....266

Blind Spot Monitor function.... 270

Rear Cross Traffic Alert function.... 273

C

Care 404, 408

Aluminum wheels 406

Exterior 404

Interior 408

Seat belts.... 409

Cargo capacity.... 552

Cargo hooks 385

CD player.... 315

Chains 276

Child restraint system.... 59

Booster seats, definition ..... 59

Booster seats, installation..... 70

Convertible seats, definition.... 59

Convertible seats, installation .... 66

Front passenger occupant classification system .... 51

Infant seats, definition.... 59

Infant seats, installation...... 66

Installing CRS with LATCH anchors.... 64

Installing CRS with seat belts....66

Installing CRS with top tether strap.... 71

Child safety 58

Airbag precautions...... 41

Back door precautions.....130

Battery precautions.....438, 545

Child restraint system 59

How your child should wear the seat belt.... 34

Installing child restraints ..... 63

Moon roof precautions.....162

Power window lock switch.... 156

Power window precautions.... 158

Rear door child-protectors.... 122

Removed key battery precautions.... 464

Seat belt extender precautions.... 37

Seat belt precautions...... 35

Seat heater precautions.....399

Child-protectors...... 122

Cleaning 404, 408

Aluminum wheels.... 406

Exterior 404

Interior......408

Seat belts.... 409

Clock 396

Coat hooks...... 401

Condenser....436

Console box....382

Cooling system

Engine overheating.... 546

Cruise control 241

Cup holders.... 383

Curtain shield airbags......38

Customizable features ..... 579

D

Daytime running light

system...... 219

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 305

Rear window.... 305

Windshield.... 290

Differential.... 558

Dimension.... 552

Dinghy towing.... 196

Display

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert).... 245

Multi-information display...... 89

Trip information.... 90

Display Audio system\*

Do-it-yourself maintenance.... 420

Doors

Automatic door locking

and unlocking system...... 123

Back door 125

Door glasses.... 156

Door lock 120, 125

Open door warning buzzer ... 104

Open door warning light ..... 507

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 154

Rear door child-protectors.... 122

Side doors 120

Driver's seat position

memory.... 143

Driving.... 164

Break-in tips.... 166

Correct posture.... 28

Driving mode select

switch 209

Procedures 164

Winter drive tips.... 276

Dynamic Torque Control

AWD system.... 261

*: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to

"Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

E

Eco drive mode......209

Eco Driving Indicator ....167

EDR (Event data recorder)......11

Electric Power Steering

(EPS)...... 261

Function......261

Warning light.... 505

Electronic key 96

Battery-saving function ..... 106

If the electronic key does not operate properly....539

Replacing the battery...... 462

Emergency, in case of

If the electronic key does not operate properly....539

If the engine will not start.....536

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P .... 538

If the vehicle has discharged battery....542

If the warning buzzer sounds.... 503

If the warning light turns on .... 503

If you have a flat tire .....519

If you lose your keys......97

If you think something is wrong.... 501

If your vehicle becomes stuck....549

If your vehicle needs to be towed....495

If your vehicle overheats.....546

Emergency flashers 492

Engine

"ACC" position 197

Accessory mode...... 201

Compartment...... 429

Engine switch 197, 200

Hood.... 425

How to start the engine 197,200

Identification number 554

If the engine will not start..... 536

Ignition switch (engine switch)...... 197, 200

Overheating.... 546

Engine coolant.... 434

Capacity.... 557

Checking.... 434

Preparing and checking before winter 276

Engine immobilizer system..... 77

Engine oil 430

Capacity.... 555

Checking.... 430

Preparing and checking before winter 276

Engine oil maintenance

data...... 413

Engine switch

(ignition switch) ...... 197, 200

Engine switch light

(ignition switch light)...... 377

EPS (Electronic Power

Steering) 261

Function...... 261

Warning light.... 505

Event data recorder (EDR)...... 11

F

Flat tire.... 519

Floor mats 26

Fluid

Automatic transaxle .....559

Brake 560

Washer 442

Fog lights 228

Replacing light bulbs......484

Switch 228

Wattage 562

Front passenger occupant

classification system......51

Front passenger's seat

belt reminder light.... 507

Front seats 137

Adjustment.... 137

Cleaning......408

Correct driving posture .....28

Driving position memory .....143

Head restraints 147

Seat heaters 398

Seat position memory.....143

Front side marker lights..... 217

Light switch.....217

Replacing light bulbs......483

Wattage 562

Front turn signal lights .....214

Replacing light bulbs......482

Turn signal lever 214

Wattage 562

Fuel 554

Capacity.... 554

Fuel gauge.... 87

Fuel pump shut off system.... 502

Information.... 563

Refueling 237

Type.... 237, 554

Warning light.... 507

Fuel pump shut off system..... 502

Fuses.... 465

G

Gauges 87

Glove box.... 381

Grocery bag hooks...... 385

H

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone) 349

HD Radio® system

Head restraints 147

Headlights.... 217

Automatic High Beam...... 221

Light switch.... 217

Replacing light bulbs .... 478, 480

Wattage 562

Heaters

Automatic air conditioning system.... 295

Manual air conditioning system.... 288

Seat heaters.... 398

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 305

*: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

High mounted stoplight

Replacing...... 489

Hood 425

Hooks

Cargo hooks 385

Coat hooks......401

Grocery bag hooks ....385

Retaining hooks (floor mat)....26

Horn 216

|

I/M test 419

Identification 553

Engine.... 554

Vehicle 553

Ignition switch

(engine switch)...... 197, 200

Ignition switch light

(engine switch light) 377

Illuminated entry system .....379

Immobilizer system....77

Indicators 82

Initialization

Maintenance 413

Moon roof.... 161

Power back door.... 129

Tire pressure warning system......445

Inside rear view mirror...... 151

Instrument panel light

control....88

Interior lights.... 377

Switch 378

Wattage 562

Intuitive parking assist......253

J

Jack

Positioning a floor jack...... 427

Vehicle-equipped jack.... 520

Jack handle.... 520, 525

Jam protection function

Moon roof 160

Power back door opener and closer.... 129

Power windows.... 157

K

Keyless entry.... 99, 113

Smart key system.... 99

Wireless remote control..... 113

Keys.... 96

Battery-saving function...... 106

Electronic key 96

Engine switch 197, 200

If the electronic key does not operate properly.... 539

If you lose your keys...... 97

Key number plate 96

Keyless entry.... 99, 113

Keys....96

Replacing the battery...... 462

Warning buzzer 104

Wireless remote control key...... 113

L

LATCH anchors 64

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)....245

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever...... 425
Hood lock release lever ..... 425
Shift lever.... 207
Turn signal lever ......214
Wiper lever....229

License plate lights 217

Light switch.....217
Replacing light bulbs......488
Wattage 562

Light

Engine switch light (ignition switch light)......377
Fog light switch.... 228
Headlight switch.... 217
Illuminated entry system..... 379
Interior lights 378
Interior light list.... 377
Luggage compartment light....128
Personal lights 378
Replacing light bulbs.....476
Turn signal lever ......214
Vanity lights 395
Wattage 562

Light bulbs

Replacing...... 476
Wattage 562

Lock steering column .....203

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself
maintenance......420
General maintenance .....415
Maintenance data 552
Maintenance
requirements ....412

Malfunction indicator lamp..... 504

Meter 87
Indicators....82
Instrument panel light control 88
Meters....87
Multi-information display...... 89
Warning lights.... 503

Micro dust and pollen filter .... 300

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror..... 151
Outside rear view mirror defoggers 305
Outside rear view mirrors ..... 154
Vanity mirrors 395

Moon roof.... 159
Jam protection function ..... 160
Operation.... 159

MP3 disc.... 320

Multi-information display...... 89
Switching the display.... 90
Trip information....90

N

Navigation system*

Noise from under vehicle ..... 8

*: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

O

Odometer....90

Oil

Engine oil.... 555

Rear differential oil....558

Transfer oil.... 559

Opener

Back door.... 125

Fuel filler door.... 239

Hood 425

Outside rear view mirrors..... 154

Adjusting and folding 154

Blind Spot Monitor 266

Outside rear view mirror defoggers 305

Outside temperature display....89

Overheating, Engine.... 546

P

Parking assist sensors

(Intuitive parking assist).....253

Parking brake....215

Operation.... 215

Parking brake engaged warning buzzer....503

Parking lights.... 217

Light switch.... 217

Replacing light bulbs....482

Wattage 562

Personal lights.... 377

Switch 378

Wattage 562

Power back door opener

and closer.... 125

Power outlet...... 397

Power steering (Electric

Power Steering system)...... 261

Warning light.... 505

Power windows 156

Jam protection function ..... 157

Operation.... 156

Window lock switch 156

R

Radiator...... 436

Radio 312

Radio Broadcast Data System (RBDS) ^*

Rear seat 139

Adjustment.... 139

Folding down the rear seatbacks.... 140

Rear side marker lights...... 217

Light switch.... 217

Replacing light bulbs 486

Wattage 562

Rear turn signal lights ...... 214

Replacing light bulbs 486

Turn signal lever.... 214

Wattage 562

Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror..... 151

Outside rear view mirrors ..... 154

Rear view monitor system

Rear window defogger...... 305

Rear window wiper.... 234

Refueling 237

Capacity.... 554

Fuel types 237,554

Opening the fuel tank cap..... 239

Replacing

Electronic key battery 462

Fuses.... 465

Light bulbs 476

Tires....519

Wireless remote control battery 462

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners....590

Reset the maintenance

data...... 413

\$

Seat belts....30

Adjusting the seat belt .....33

Automatic Locking Retractor....34

Child restraint system installation ....63

Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt.... 409

Emergency Locking Retractor....34

How to wear your seat belt.....30

How your child should wear the seat belt.... 34

Pregnant women, proper seat belt use.... 35

Reminder light and buzzer.... 507

Seat belt extender....34

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners ....591

Seat belt pretensioners.....33

SRS warning light ....504

Seat heaters 398

Seat position memory...... 143

Seating capacity 180

Seats...... 137, 139

Adjustment.... 137, 139

Adjustment precautions.... 138, 141

Child seats/child restraint system installation.... 63

Cleaning 408

Driving position memory..... 143

Folding down the rear seatbacks.... 140

Head restraint.... 147

Properly sitting in the seat..... 28

Seat heaters.... 398

Seat position memory...... 143

Sensor

Automatic headlight system.... 219

Inside rear view mirror..... 153

Intuitive parking assist ..... 253

LDA (Lane Departure Alert).... 245

Service reminder indicators..... 82

Shift lever

Automatic transmission ..... 207

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.... 538

Shift lock system.... 538

Shopping bag hooks...... 385

Side airbags.... 38

Side marker lights 217

Light switch.... 217

Replacing light bulbs .... 483, 486

Wattage 562

Side mirrors 154

Adjusting and folding 154

Blind Spot Monitor 266

Side turn signal lights.....214

Replacing light bulbs......489

Turn signal lever 214

Smart key system.... 99

Antenna location....102

Entry functions.... 99

Starting the engine....200

Snow tires 279

Spare tire.... 519

Inflation pressure 561

Storage location....520

Spark plug.... 557

Specifications ....552

Speedometer.... 87

Sport mode...... 209

Steering lock.... 198, 203

Steering wheel 150

Adjustment....150

Audio switches.... 346

Stop/tail lights

Replacing light bulbs....486

Wattage 562

Storage feature ....380

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes

stuck....549

Sun shade

Roof 160

Sun visors 395

Switch

All-wheel drive lock switch.... 259

Audio remote control

switches 346

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

switch 266

Cruise control switch ..... 241

"DISP" button.... 90

Door lock switch 121

Driving mode select

switch 209

Driving position memory

switches 143

"ECO MODE" button..... 209

Emergency flashers

switch 492

Engine switch 197, 200

Fog light switch.... 228

Ignition switch.... 197, 200

Intuitive parking assist ..... 253

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert).... 246

Light switches...... 217

Moon roof switches.... 159

Outside rear view mirror

switches 154

Power back door main

switch 127

Power back door opener

and closer switch.... 125

Power door lock switch..... 121

Power window switch ..... 156

Rear window wiper and

washer switch.... 234

Rear window and outside

rear view mirror

defoggers switch 305

Seat heater switches...... 398

Window lock switch..... 156

Windshield wipers and washer switch.... 229

T

Tachometer 87

Tail lights.... 217

Light switch.....217

Replacing light bulbs....487

Wattage 562

Talk switch*

Telephone switches*......355

Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system..... 77

Theft prevention labels ...... 79

Tire inflation pressure...... 561

Maintenance data 561

Warning light.... 508

Tire information 566

Glossary 573

Size....569

Tire identification number .....568

Uniform Tire Quality

Grading....571

Tire pressure warning

system...... 445

Function 445

Initializing...... 445

Installing tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters.... 445

Registering ID codes .....447

Tire pressure warning reset switch 445

Warning light.... 508

Tires.... 443

Chains 276

Checking.... 443

If you have a flat tire 519

Inflation pressure...... 561

Information...... 566

Replacing....519

Rotating tires 444

Size....561

Snow tires....279

Spare tire.... 519

Tire pressure warning system.... 445

Warning light.... 508

Tools.... 520

Top tether strap.... 71

Total load capacity...... 552

Towing

Dinghy towing.... 196

Emergency towing...... 495

Towing eyelet 496

Trailer towing.... 181

TRAC (Traction Control)...... 260

Transmission

Automatic transmission ..... 207

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.... 538

Selecting the driving mode... 209

Trip information.... 90

Trip meters....90

Turn signal lights 214

Replacing light bulbs..... 482, 486, 489

Turn signal lever.... 214

Wattage 562

*: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

U

USB port.... 335

Utility vehicle precautions..... 281

V

Valet key.... 96

Vanity lights 395

Vanity lights 395

Wattage 562

Vanity mirrors ....395

Vehicle data recordings......10

Vehicle identification number.... 553

Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) 260

Voice command system ^* VSC (Vehicle Stability

Control) 260

W

Warning buzzers.... 503

Brake system....503

Downshifting 211

Key reminder ....511

Open back door 507

Open door 507

Open moon roof.... 161

Seat belt remainder .....507

Warning lights.... 503

ABS....504

Automatic High Beam...... 505

Automatic transmission fluid temperature .... 505

Brake system....503

Charging system.... 504

Electric power steering ..... 505

Low engine oil pressure..... 504

Low fuel level.... 507

Malfunction indicator lamp.... 504

Open door 507

Seat belt reminder light...... 507

Slip indicator.... 505

SRS 504

Tire pressure 508

Washer 229

Checking.... 442

Preparing and checking before winter 276

Switch...... 229

Washing and waxing...... 404

Weights

Cargo capacity.... 552

Load limits 180

Weights...... 552

Wheels.... 457

Replacing wheels 457

Size.... 561

Window glasses 156

Window lock switch 156

Windows.... 156

Power windows.... 156

Rear window defogger...... 305

Windshield wiper de-icer...... 307

Windshield wipers...... 229

Intermittent windshield wipers.... 229

Winter driving tips.... 276

Wireless remote control

key 113

Locking/Unlocking.... 113

Replacing the battery...... 462

WMA disc ....320

X

XM® Satellite Radio*

*: For vehicles with a Display Audio system, refer to "Display Audio System Owner's Manual".

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever Fuel filler door P. 425 P. 239 Hood lock release lever Fuel filler door opener Tire inflation pressure P. 425 P. 239 P. 561 IIBPRV003

Fuel tank capacity (Reference)	15.9 gal. (60 L, 13.2 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type	Unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) P. 237, 554
Cold tire inflation pressure	P. 561
Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill — reference)	qt. (L, Imp.qt.) With filter 4.6 (4.4 3.9) Without filter 4.2 (4.0 3.5)
Engine oil type	“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20 P. 555